JP6488579B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when a new game is started by operating the start lever in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes a pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern on each of the plurality of variation display sections,
Start operation means operated to start display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation unit;
A plurality of stop operation means operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
In the variation display section corresponding to the stop operation means, the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the stop operation means is operated. A game for controlling the design display means at each game time, when the change display of the picture is stopped and the change display of the picture in all of the plurality of change display units is stopped once. A time control means;
With
If a stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after displaying the variation of the pattern in the plurality of change display units, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. Of the player's profits are given to the player,
This game machine
An execution time ending means for ending one execution time of the special gaming state when a game time that is an end opportunity is executed in a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
A branch state setting means for setting a continuous branch state when one execution of the special gaming state is completed;
Normal transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the normal gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the branching is possible in the continuous branching state;
Special transition means for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state when a special transition condition is satisfied in the situation where the branching is possible in the continuous branch state;
Equipped with a,
The branchable state occurs when a result of the lottery process of the combination is a result corresponding to branch transition, and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units is stopped in an order corresponding to branch transition. To do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the front door is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of a stop symbol when each winning a prize generate | occur | produces. It is an electrical block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed in main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel when the lottery table for normal modes is selected, and the winning mode established. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process performed in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of lottery mode, and the transfer mode of lottery mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel in case the 1st RT mode lottery table is selected, and the winning type established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel in case the 2nd RT mode lottery table is selected, and the winning type established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus RT modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel when the lottery table for bonus RT modes is selected, and the winning mode established. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process of the lottery mode performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the non-AT process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in AT performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus preparation state process performed in sub side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a bonus state is performed. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a bonus state is performed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area of main side RAM utilized in order to perform a continuation chance period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the frequency notification image. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus RT management process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state process performed in sub side MPU. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect of the reel in a unit production. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the continuation period of a continuation chance period is extended. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a continuation chance period advances. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the start of the continuation chance period performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuation chances performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process of the storage area performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during unit production performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for cancellation performed in main side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the progress contents of the continuation chance period in case cancellation operation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the completion | finish branch process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART preparation state process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state process performed in sub side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that an ART completion | finish branch state is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the ART termination | terminus branch process performed in sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stop order alerting | reporting performed by sub side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table referred in the lottery process of stop order notification. (A) It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline | summary of the electrical structure of the game hall in which many slot machines were installed, (b) It is a front view of the external terminal board provided in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process performed in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the memory area of main side RAM utilized in order to perform the continuation chance period in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus RT management process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuation chances performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for cancellation performed in main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart showing bonus state processing executed by the sub-side MPU, and (b) contents of effects that make it possible for the player to recognize that there is no lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result (C) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an effect that allows the player to recognize that there was lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuation chances performed by the main side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for cancellation performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for cancellation performed in main side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state process performed in the sub side MPU in 6th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing | casing 11 is formed in the box shape open | released ahead as a whole by fixing a some wooden panel.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the inner space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed with the left side portion as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key to the key cylinder 14.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided on the upper side of the central portion of the front door 12. The gaming panel 20 is formed with three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R on a one-to-one basis. Yes. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be individually rotated, that is, independently driven by the driving of each stepping motor. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, a start lever 41 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided. When the start lever 41 is operated while a medal is bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are respectively disposed directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed after the left reel 32L starts to rotate.

  The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal is awarded. Until the execution of various processes such as management of the game state is completed, it corresponds to one game (game time).

  On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is provided a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals as investment values. As shown in FIG. 2, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 when it can be inserted, and when it cannot be inserted. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59. The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning corresponding to the medal grant is established on the active line. .

  A return button 46 is provided below the medal slot 45 when the medal inserted into the medal slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52, as shown in FIG. Also, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be bet at once and two virtual medals are inserted at a time. There are provided a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

  An adjustment button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. In other words, the slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the stored and stored condition, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 58 as an actual medal.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and the setting state of the slot machine 10 from “setting 1” to “ And a setting key insertion hole 57 operated to change within the range of “setting 6”.

<Patterns attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

  FIG. 3 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers from 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers are in a state that the main controller 70 can be visually recognized from the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As symbols, “bell” symbol (for example, 20th of left reel 32L), “replay 1” symbol (for example, 19th of left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), “Red 7” symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 32L), “Replay 2” symbol (for example, eleventh of left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (for example, tenth of left reel 32L), “Cherry” There are nine types of symbols (for example, the ninth of the left reel 32L), “Replay 3” symbol (for example, the sixth of the left reel 32L), and “White 7” symbol (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 3, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

  FIG. 4 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that there are three symbols that allow the entire symbol to be visually recognized among the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel. For this reason, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

  In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate with the prescribed number of medals bet and a winning corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the benefit of paying out medals, replaying Or a benefit of the transition of the gaming state.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line where a winning can be established. The main line ML is set not as a line extending in a straight line but as a bending line. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. Sub-line SL3 connecting the connected subline SL2, the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R On the line extending in a straight line such as the sub-line SL4 connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the sub-line SL5 connecting the upper symbol of the right reel 32R, Even if a combination is established, no winning is achieved. The number of main lines ML is not limited to one, and may be two, three, four, or five or more. In such a configuration in which a plurality of main lines ML are set, the number of bets It is good also as a structure from which the number of main lines ML validated according to differs. Further, the main line ML is not limited to a bent line, and may be a line extending in a straight line.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be awarded and a privilege to be given when a prize is won will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols for winning and a privilege given when winning, and FIGS. 6A to 6J show each winning. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the stop symbol | symbol in case this occurs.

  As the small prize winning for which medals are paid out, there are the first to twelfth supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, and the second watermelon prize.

  Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “White 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is The “replay 1” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, or the “replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is any one of the “replay 1” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, and the “replay 3” symbol. If it is, it becomes one of the first supplementary prize to the ninth supplementary prize. If the “Red 7” symbol, “Bell” symbol, and “Bell” symbol are stopped from the left on the main line ML, the tenth supplementary prize is awarded, and the “BAR” symbol, “Bell” symbol from the left on the main line ML When the “bell” symbol is stopped, the eleventh supplementary prize is awarded. When the “watermelon” symbol, the “bell” symbol, and the “bell” symbol are stopped from the left in the main line ML, the eleventh supplementary prize is awarded. In the case of any of the first supplementary prize to the twelfth supplementary prize, one medal is paid out.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is any one of the “replay 1” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, and the “replay 3” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is a “bell” symbol, a first bell win is obtained. If the first bell wins, 4 medals will be paid out.

  In the case of the first bell winning, as shown in FIG. 6A, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become “bell” symbols in the lower subline SL4. A player can easily recognize that a winning is achieved when the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a straight line. In this case, the combination of the same “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed at the time of the first bell winning, thereby making it easy for the player to recognize the occurrence of winning in the configuration in which the winning establishment mode in the main line ML is diversified. It becomes possible.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “bell” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “cherry” symbol and a “watermelon” symbol. If it is either, the second bell wins. If the second bell wins, 9 medals are paid out.

  In the case of the second bell winning, as shown in FIG. 6B, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become “bell” symbols in the subline SL5 that rises to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell has been won. Further, the line where the combination of the “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed when the second bell is won is the subline SL5, which is different from the subline SL4 where the combination of the “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell is won. Such a difference allows the player to distinguish between the first bell prize and the second bell prize.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is “Watermelon” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is the “watermelon” symbol, the first watermelon prize is awarded. If the first watermelon is won, 4 medals will be paid out.

  In the case of the first watermelon winning, as shown in FIG. 6C, all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be “watermelon” symbols in the sub-line SL1 that is descending to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first watermelon prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the left reel 32L is stopped at a timing when the “cherry” symbol passes through the upper, middle, or lower tiers, the combination of the “watermelon” symbol is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1 when the first watermelon winning is made.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the “BAR” symbol or the “red 7” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is “ In the case of the “watermelon” symbol, it becomes the second watermelon prize. When the second watermelon is won, four medals are paid out.

  In the case of the second watermelon winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (d), all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become “watermelon” symbols in the lower subline SL4. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second watermelon prize has been won. The line where the combination of the “watermelon” symbol is stopped when the second watermelon prize is won is the subline SL4, which is different from the subline SL1 where the combination of the “watermelon” symbol is stopped when the first watermelon prize is won. Such a difference allows the player to distinguish between the first watermelon prize and the second watermelon prize.

  As a prize to be given a replay privilege that allows a player to play the next game without betting a medal (or virtual medal), a normal replay prize, a bell replay prize, a first cherry replay prize, and a second cherry replay prize are given. There are a winning, a first special replay winning, a second special replay winning, a first RT replay winning, a second RT replay winning, a first special replay winning, a second special replay winning, a first falling replay winning, and a second falling replay winning.

  Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “White 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is When the “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol, or “Replay 3” symbol is selected, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the “White 7” symbol or the “Watermelon” symbol, the normal replay winning It becomes.

  In the case of a normal replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6E, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are “Replay 1”, “Replay 2”, and “Replay 3” in the middle subline SL3. One of the symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a normal replay prize has been won.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “White 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is “Cherry” symbol. When the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the “cherry” symbol or the “watermelon” symbol, a bell replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of a bell replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (f), the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R all become “bell” symbols in the upper subline SL2. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the player has won the Bell Replay. In addition, the line where the combination of the “bell” symbol is stopped and displayed in the Bell Replay winning is the subline SL2, the subline SL4 in which the combination of the “Bell” symbol is stopped and displayed in the first Bell winning, and the “bell” is displayed in the second Bell winning combination. This is different from the subline SL5 in which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Such a difference allows the player to distinguish the bell replay prize from the first bell prize and the second bell prize.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “bell” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “cherry” symbol, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “white 7” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol. And if it is one of the “watermelon” symbols, it becomes the first cherry replay prize.

  In the case of the first cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6G, all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be “cherry” symbols in the sub-line SL1 that descends to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combination of “cherry” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first cherry replay winning is won, the image display device 66 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “cherry” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. Motivational effects are executed. When the stop button 42-44 is operated to stop displaying the “cherry” symbol after confirming the production, two “cherry” symbols or three “cherry” symbols are stopped in the subline SL1. Can be displayed.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is any one of the “replay 1” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, and the “replay 3” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any one of the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol, the second cherry replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of winning the second cherry replay, as shown in FIG. 6 (h), the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all be “cherry” symbols in the upper subline SL2. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of “cherry” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the second cherry replay winning is won, the image display device 66 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “cherry” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. Motivational effects are executed. When the stop button 42-44 is operated to stop displaying the “cherry” symbol after confirming the effect, two “cherry” symbols or three “cherry” symbols are stopped in the subline SL2. Can be displayed. Further, the line in which the combination of “cherry” symbols is stopped and displayed in the second cherry replay winning is the subline SL2, and is different from the subline SL1 in which the combination of “cherry” symbols is stopped and displayed in the first cherry replay winning. Such a difference allows the player to distinguish between the first cherry replay winning and the second cherry replay winning.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of the “white 7” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “cherry” symbol, and the right reel When the stop symbol of 32R is the “red 7” symbol, the first special replay winning is obtained.

  In the case of the first special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (i), the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can all be “red 7” symbols in the lower subline SL4. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of “red 7” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the first special replay winning is won, the image display device 66 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “red 7” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. An effect that is motivating to perform can be executed. When the stop button 42-44 is operated to stop displaying the “red 7” symbol after confirming the effect, three “red 7” symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL4.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol, and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is “Bell” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is either the “cherry” symbol or the “watermelon” symbol, the second special replay winning is obtained. In the case of the second special replay winning, an event in which all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol, and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay” If the symbol is either “2” symbol or “Replay 3” symbol, the first RT replay prize is awarded. Here, since the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary as to whether or not the first RT replay winning is made, for example, the first “Replay 1” symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the left reel 32L. At the same time, when the 4th “white 7” symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped and displayed in the upper stage in the situation where the first “replay 3” symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the right reel 32R, “white 7” is displayed. "The combination of symbols will be stopped and displayed on a straight line. Therefore, in the case of the first RT replay winning, stop control of the middle reel 32M is performed in the reel control process described later so that an event in which all three symbols that are stopped and displayed on a straight line do not have the same symbol occurs. .

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the “white 7” symbol or the “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is “ If the symbol is one of the “Replay 1” symbol, the “Replay 2” symbol, and the “Replay 3” symbol, the second RT replay prize is awarded. In the case of the second RT replay winning, an event in which all the three symbols stopped and displayed on the straight line become the same symbol does not occur.

  When the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “white 7” symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the “white 7” symbol on the main line ML, the first special replay winning is achieved. Note that the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is arbitrary as to whether or not the first special replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of the first special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (j), the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all “white 7” symbols in the right-down subline SL1 and the right-up subline SL5. Can be. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of “white 7” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the first special replay winning is won, the image display device 66 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the “white 7” symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. An effect that is motivating to perform is executed. When the stop button 42-44 is operated to stop and display the “white 7” symbol after confirming the effect, the three “white 7” symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol, and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay” If the symbol is “2” or “Replay 3” and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is any of the “White 7” symbol, the “Cherry” symbol, and the “Watermelon” symbol, Become. In the case of the second special replay winning, an event in which all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol, and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is “Cherry” symbol, When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is either the “cherry” symbol or the “watermelon” symbol, the first falling replay winning is made. In the case of the first fall replay winning, an event in which all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “bell” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “cherry” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “replay 1” symbol, “replay 2”. In the case of either the symbol or the “Replay 3” symbol, a second falling replay winning is obtained. In the case of the second falling replay winning, an event in which all the three symbols stopped and displayed on the straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

  If any of the above replay wins is made, it is possible to play the next game while making bets unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, the next game can be started in a three-bet state while making a bet unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible.

  Among the above-mentioned various replay winnings, the first special replay winning, the second special replay winning, the first RT replay winning, the second RT replay winning, the first special replay winning, the second special replay winning, the first falling replay winning and the first falling replay winning. The two-fall replay winning is not only an opportunity for granting a privilege for the replay winning, but also an opportunity for changing the gaming state. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of gaming states are set so that the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities of each winning combination are different in the winning lottery process. Occurs when a replay winning prize is established. The contents of each gaming state and the conditions for shifting to each gaming state will be described in detail later.

<Apparatus for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, an apparatus for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 64 and a speaker 65 are provided on the upper portion of the front door 12, and an image display device 66 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 64 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality and in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 64 is controlled to emit light so that a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 66 is performed. The speakers 65 are provided as a pair of left and right, and sound output control is performed so that when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, sound or sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and sound or sound corresponding to the winning result Is controlled so that sound is output. Further, the sound output of the speaker 65 is controlled so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 66 is performed.

  The image display device 66 has a display surface. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. In addition, the image display device 66 is controlled to display images corresponding to the winning combination result in the internal lottery and the winning results in each game on the display surface.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main controller 70 is configured with a main board housed in a board box. When the substrate box is opened, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and a broken portion is generated when the fastening state is released. By confirming the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the substrate box has been opened.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub controller 80 in addition to the main controller 70. The sub control device 80 is disposed on the front door 12 so as to overlap the rear of the image display device 66. The sub control device 80 executes control of the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 based on the command received from the main control device 70. Note that the sub-control device 80 is similar to the main control device 70 in that a control board is accommodated in a board box.

<Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 72 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 that outputs a rectangular wave with a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, and each Stop detection sensors 42 a, 43 a, 44 a that individually detect the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45 a that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and the credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49. Credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting the operation of the payment, a payment detection sensor 51a for detecting the operation of the payment button 51, a payout detection sensor for the hopper device 53, and a reset detection sensor 56a for detecting the operation of the reset button 56. The setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57. And various sensors such as setting the key detection sensor 57a for detecting are connected to it, these signals from the sensors are input to the MPU 72.

  To the output side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a sub control device 80, and the like are connected. In each game, the MPU 72 performs rotational drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31, and the hopper device 53 is controlled by the MPU 72 when a small winning combination is established and a medal is paid out. Is done. In addition, a command is transmitted from the MPU 72 to the sub-control device 80 at each timing of each game.

  A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply unit 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit for supplying driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power source unit from an external power source. The monitored voltage is monitored, and when the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving a power failure signal, and can return to the processing state before the power failure after power recovery. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power interruption unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as a power interruption during a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during power interruption (for example, one or two days). Is done. However, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

  The sub-control device 80 includes a sub-control board 81 for executing execution control of various notifications and various effects. An MPU 82 is mounted on the sub control board 81. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84, a clock circuit 85 that outputs a rectangular wave with a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  Note that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be made into a chip individually. Further, the RAM 84 is supplied with backup power from the power supply unit during power interruption of the power supply device 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, and the situation where the backup power is supplied (for example, one day). Or 2 days), data is stored and held in the RAM 84. However, the data stored in the RAM 84 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

  The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 and receives various commands from the MPU 72.

  An upper lamp 64, a speaker 65, and an image display device 66 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 82 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 64, sound output control of the speaker 65, and display control of the image display device 66, thereby providing various notifications and various effects. To be done.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, the ROM 73, and the RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main side MPU 72, the main side ROM 73, and the main side RAM 74, respectively. They are referred to as MPU 82, sub-side ROM 83, and sub-side RAM 84.

<Processing executed by main MPU 72 and sub MPU 82>
Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 will be described. First, the contents of basic processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described.

  The main MPU 72 can be roughly classified into a normal process that is repeatedly executed after execution of the main process started when the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt process that is started by periodically interrupting the normal process. Yes, for convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then normal processing will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interruption process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

  In the register saving process (step S101), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S103, and processing at power failure is executed.

  The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. When the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal when the power failure is eliminated is stored in the main RAM 74, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  When the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed. In step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing a watchdog timer value for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving each stepping motor is performed. In step S107, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and sensor monitoring processing for monitoring whether the read result is normal is performed. In step S108, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the outside.

  In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the sub-control device 80 is performed. In step S111, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S112, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S201), and then a start waiting process is performed (step S202). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay winnings has occurred, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process ends. If no replay winning has occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated. If the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are operated between the previous start wait process and the current start wait process If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets or the like is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

  After the start waiting process is finished, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a specified number (“3” in the present embodiment) (step S203). If the bet number has not reached the specified number, The process returns to the start wait process (step S202). If the bet number has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S204).

  If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start wait process (step S202). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, after the main line ML is validated, the bet acceptance is prohibited by controlling the selector 52 (step S205). Thereafter, a lottery process for drawing a winning combination in the current game is executed (step S206), and “1” is set in the continuation chance flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S207: (YES), continuation chance processing for performing control for the continuation chance period is executed (step S208), on condition that “1” is not set in the continuation chance flag of the main RAM 74 (step S207: NO) ), A reel control process for controlling the driving of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (step S206) is executed (step S209).

  Thereafter, a medal payout process is executed (step S210). In the medal payout process, when a small prize winning is established in the current game, a process for giving a player a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small prize winning is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, a value corresponding to the current small role winning is added to the virtual medal area provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the virtual medal area reaches the maximum value. If the number of medals exceeds the maximum value, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that medals for several minutes are paid out to the medal tray 59.

  Thereafter, a bonus RT management process for controlling the bonus RT state is executed (step S211), and an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the hall computer provided in the game hall is executed. Later (step S212), the process returns to step S201.

<Lottery processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the lottery process in step S206 in the normal process (FIG. 9).

  First, a random number used for determining whether or not a winning combination is obtained is acquired (step S301). In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After acquiring the random number, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is read from the main ROM 73 (step S302). Here, in this slot machine 10, winning probabilities in six stages from “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. By performing the above, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the lottery process. Note that “setting n + 1” is more advantageous for the player than “setting n”. Further, as the lottery modes in which the lottery table is different in the main MPU 72 even if the set values are in the same stage, the normal mode, the first RT mode, the second RT mode, the extra RT mode, and the bonus RT mode are four. Kind exists. In step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current lottery mode is selected.

  The lottery table will be described by taking the normal mode lottery table selected when “setting 3” is in the normal mode as an example. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view for explaining the normal mode lottery table. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, an index value IV is set in the normal mode lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value of the free-run counter (“65535”).

  Specifically, the second bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set for IV = 1. When winning is won with IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 12, the second stop is the second reel when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the first supplementary winning, the fifth supplementary winning, and the ninth supplementary winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the first supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur.

  In the slot machine 10, reel control is performed for each of the reels 32 </ b> L, 32 </ b> M, and 32 </ b> R that can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, the reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped until the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a winning corresponding to the winning combination, and avoid the winning corresponding to the winning combination. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a winning is formed in one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the corresponding constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also called “missing”). Say). The first to twelfth supplementary prizes, the first to second watermelon prizes, the first special replay prize and the first special replay prize are the winning modes in which the missed outage may occur.

  In IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 11, second bell winning data, second compensation winning data, fourth compensating winning data, and ninth compensating winning data are set. If the winning combination is IV = 2, the second stop is the second reel when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, as shown in FIG. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any of the second supplementary winning, the fourth supplementary winning, and the ninth supplementary winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur.

  In IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 11, second bell winning data, second compensation winning data, sixth compensating winning data, and seventh compensating winning data are set. When the winning combination is IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 12, the second stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. The bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the second supplementary winning, the sixth supplementary winning, and the seventh supplementary winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize will occur.

  In IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 11, the second bell winning data, the third compensation winning data, the fifth compensation winning data, and the seventh compensation winning data are set. When the winning combination is IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 12, the second stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The Bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any of the third supplementary winning, the fifth supplementary winning, and the seventh supplementary winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize will occur.

  At IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 11, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, Supplementary winning data and ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning is won with IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, In other cases, any of the first supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, any of the first supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize does not occur. there is a possibility. The probability that this loss will occur is lower than in the case of IV = 1-4.

  In IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 11, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the sixth supplementary winning data, and the eighth Supplementary winning data and ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning is won at IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, In other cases, any one of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, any of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize does not occur. there is a possibility. The probability that this loss will occur is lower than in the case of IV = 1-4.

  In IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 11, the first watermelon winning data, the second watermelon winning data, the tenth supplementary winning data, the eleventh supplementary winning data, and the twelfth supplementary winning data are set. ing. When winning is won with IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning may be established. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the first watermelon winning nor the second watermelon winning will occur. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any of the tenth supplementary prize, the eleventh supplementary prize, and the twelfth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the tenth supplementary prize, the eleventh supplementary prize, and the twelfth supplementary prize will occur.

  In IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 11, the bell replay winning data is set. When winning is won with IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 12, a bell replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44.

  At IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 11, the first cherry replay winning data is set. When winning is won with IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 12, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. .

  At IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 11, the second cherry replay winning data is set. When winning is won with IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 12, the second cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. .

  In IV = 11 to 14, as shown in FIG. 11, normal replay winning data, first special replay winning data, and second special replay winning data are set. In this case, when winning is won with IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In addition, either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is performed for each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing. In addition, when winning is won at IV = 12, the first special replay winning and the first special replay win and the second reel are when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Any one of the two special replay winnings is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is certainly generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 To do. In addition, when winning is won with IV = 13, the first special replay winning and the first special replay win and the second reel are when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. Any one of the two special replay winnings is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is certainly generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 To do. Also, when winning is won with IV = 14, the first special replay win and the second stop are when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Any one of the two special replay winnings is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is certainly generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 To do.

  In IV = 15 to 18, normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set as shown in FIG. In this case, when winning is won with IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In addition, the first RT replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is certainly generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when winning is won at IV = 16, the first RT replay winning is each stop when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The button 42 to 44 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when winning is won at IV = 17, the first RT replay winning is each stop when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The button 42 to 44 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when winning is won with IV = 18, the first RT replay winning is each stop when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The button 42 to 44 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 11 is selected, the probability of winning when IV = 1, the probability of winning when IV = 2, the probability of winning when IV = 3, IV = 4 The probability of winning in each case is about 1 / 9.3, and the probability of winning in the case of IV = 5 and the probability of winning in the case of IV = 6 are about 1 / 12.9, respectively. The probability of winning when IV = 7 is about 1 / 66.8, the probability of winning when IV = 8 is about 1/122, and when IV = 9 The probability is about 1/212, the probability of winning when IV = 10 is about 1/423, the probability of winning when IV = 11, the probability of winning when IV = 12, = 13, the probability of winning when IV = 14, and the probability of winning when IV = 14 is about 1 / 91.7, respectively. The probability of winning when 5 = 4, the probability of winning when IV = 16, the probability of winning when IV = 17, and the probability of winning when IV = 18 are about 1 / 40.3 respectively. It is.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 10), after selecting the lottery table (step S302), the index value IV is set to 1 (step S303), and the determination value DV used to determine whether the winning combination is determined (step). S304). In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and a point value PV corresponding to “1” that is the current index value IV is added to the random value. A new determination value DV is assumed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct (step S305). In the combination determination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the value exceeds 65535, winning data acquisition processing for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S306). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the lottery table to be referenced is set in the main RAM 74. The state in which the corresponding winning data is set is cleared to “0” after the end of the current game regardless of whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning data has been established.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 (step S305: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S307), and it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether or not, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV. In step S305, whether or not a winning combination is made is determined based on the determination value DV.

  If the process of step S306 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S308, it means that the winning combination determination has ended. In this case, a lottery result command is set (step S309). The lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub MPU 82 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the combination, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the determination result of the winning / rejecting combination. The lottery result command includes data indicating whether the current lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is the normal mode, the first RT mode, the second RT mode, the extra RT mode, or the bonus RT mode. Thereafter, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is executed (step S310), and continuation chance period start processing for starting the continuation chance period is executed (step S311). The stop information first setting process and the continuation chance period start process will be described later.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process of step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 9) will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S401). In the rotation start process, a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the previous game. If it has not elapsed, it waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has elapsed, a wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing in step S106 in the timer interruption processing (FIG. 8), and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Thereafter, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can issue a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44. This is notified to a player or the like.

  Following the rotation start process, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S402). When none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the process waits until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued (step S403). . If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step S402 and waits until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command command is set (step S404).

  The stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub-control device 80 in order to grasp which stop button 42 to 44 is operated to generate a stop command. When the stop command command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S405 to S411 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

  In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S405). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Thereafter, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated (step S406).

  In the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, a stop mode for stopping the reaching symbol reaching the base position as it is is supported. Stop mode for stopping the reel to be slid after one symbol, Stop mode for stopping after sliding for two symbols, Stop mode for stopping after sliding for three symbols, Stop after sliding for four symbols There are prepared five patterns of stop modes. Accordingly, in step S406, a value from “0” to “4” is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

  Thereafter, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S407). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol (step S408). (Step S409). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped (step S410). If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S411), and the process returns to step S402.

  Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10). By using the stop information, When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically “0” to “4”) for the reaching symbol that has reached the base point position. As the stop information, slip number data indicating a correspondence relationship between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is derived during rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .

  As processing for setting the stop information, stop information first setting processing executed in step S310 of the lottery processing (FIG. 10) and stop information executed in step S411 of the reel control processing (FIG. 13). The second setting process exists. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the lottery process result. For example, if the winning mode is any one of IV = 1 to 7 and 11 to 18 in the normal mode, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the stop order and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 12 is set. In addition, if the winning state is any of IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode, the stop order that allows the establishment of either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is the first. The establishment of the first special replay prize is prioritized over the establishment of the second special replay prize, and stop information for establishing the second special replay prize is set when the establishment of the first special replay prize is impossible.

  The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop point of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. To do. For example, if the winning mode is any of IV = 1 to 7 and 11 to 18 in the normal mode, the set winning data and the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that generated the stop command Based on the stop outcome, it is a stop order that enables establishment of either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning, and it is impossible to establish the first special replay winning. If it is specified, the information is changed to stop information for establishing the second special replay winning.

  If it is determined in step S410 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S412. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a winning determination process. In the winning determination process, first, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML in the left reel 32L, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML in the middle reel 32M, and the main line ML in the right reel 32R. The type of the stopped symbol is grasped (steps S501 to S503). In grasping the symbol type, 2-byte data set for each symbol type is read from the main ROM 73. Then, as a symbol combination logical operation process, 2-byte data corresponding to the symbol combination is derived by ANDing each 2-byte data grasped in steps S501 to S503 in the same order. Step S504).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data derived in step S504 corresponds to any winning data (step S505). If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, a winning correspondence process is executed (step S506). In the winning correspondence process, it is determined whether or not winning data corresponding to the winning that has occurred this time is set. If the winning data is not set, an abnormal command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80. The sub-side MPU 82 receives the abnormality command and performs abnormality notification corresponding to the illegal winning by the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. If the winning data is set, if the winning is a small role winning, the number of medals to be paid out is set as the payout target of the main RAM 74 so that a medal or virtual medal can be given in the medal payout process. Set to counter. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, in the next step S202 in the normal process (FIG. 9), a flag setting process for enabling the same number of bets as the current bet is executed.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 13), after the winning determination process is executed, a winning result command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80 in step S413. The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and includes data indicating the type of winning when the winning has been established. The winning result command includes data corresponding to the result of the lottery process executed at the start of the current game, and the lottery mode at the start of the current game is the normal mode and the first RT mode. , Data indicating whether the second RT mode, the extra RT mode, or the bonus RT mode is included. Thereafter, a lottery mode transition process for changing the lottery mode in the main MPU 72 in accordance with the current winning result is executed (step S414). The contents of the lottery mode transition process will be described in detail later.

<Details of lottery mode and transition mode of lottery mode>
Next, the contents of the lottery mode and the transition mode of the lottery mode in the lottery process (FIG. 10) for the main MPU 72 will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the lottery mode and the transition mode of the lottery mode. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first RT mode lottery table selected when “setting 3” is in the first RT mode ST2, and FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating reels 32L, 32M, FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of 32R and the winning mode to be established, and FIG. 18 shows a second RT mode lottery table selected when “setting 3” is in the second RT mode ST3. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the second RT mode ST3 and the winning mode that is established, and FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a bonus RT mode lottery table selected in the bonus RT mode ST5. Reel 32L in over de ST5, 32M, is an explanatory diagram for explaining a relationship between the prize mode is established and the stop order of 32R.

  As the lottery mode, as shown in FIG. 15, a normal mode ST1, a first RT mode ST2, a second RT mode ST3, an extra RT mode ST4, and a bonus RT mode ST5 are set. In the lottery tables of the lottery modes ST1 to ST5, the types of winning combinations that allow the medals to be paid out and the winning probabilities of the winning combinations are the same. Specifically, as described above, in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), a combination that allows the payout of medals is set at IV = 1 to 7, but IV = 1 to 7 is set. As shown in FIGS. 16, 18, and 20, the first RT mode lottery table, the second RT mode lottery table, and the bonus RT mode lottery are shown in FIG. 16, FIG. 18, and FIG. 20. The same applies to the table. Although illustration is omitted, the same applies to the additional RT mode ST4. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 15, each lottery mode ST1 to ST5 has the same winning probability (hereinafter, also referred to as a payout occurrence probability) of a combination that allows a medal to be paid out. 1 / 1.7.

  Here, in the slot machine 10, control for AT can be executed in the sub-side MPU 82. In the AT control, a combination of symbols corresponding to a case where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes a predetermined correct answer order is established on the main line ML, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out. This is control for notifying the stop order that is the correct answer order in the situation where the lottery is won. Such a lottery corresponding to the stop order can be won with a relatively high probability both when the AT control is executed and when it is not executed. However, the correct answer order is obtained when the AT control is not executed. While the stop order is not notified, the stop order that is the correct answer order is notified when the AT control is executed, so the AT control is not executed when the AT control is executed. The number of medals to be paid out per unit game is greater than the state (hereinafter also referred to as non-AT state).

  As the lottery combination corresponding to the stop order, there are specifically a combination corresponding to the first bell prize and a combination corresponding to the second bell prize. In any lottery mode, in the state where the control for the first AT is executed as the control for the AT in the sub-side MPU 82 (hereinafter also referred to as the first AT state), either IV = 1 to 6 In the case of winning, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the corresponding bell winning is notified.

  In the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the corresponding bell winning is not notified even if winning is won at any of IV = 1 to 6, the first bell winning is 1/3. It is necessary to correct the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is necessary to correct the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be 1/6 for the second bell winning. The stop order for establishing the first bell prize and the stop order for establishing the second bell prize are both stop orders in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, and the sub-side MPU 82. If the left reel 32L is not stopped for the first time in a situation where the control for AT is not executed, a penalty event will occur as will be described later. Then, when the sub-side MPU 82 is in the non-AT state, even if IV = 1 to 6 is won, it is unlikely that a bell winning will be established, and basically a medal payout is generated. A winning prize is not established, or a supplementary prize is awarded in which the number of medals paid out is one. This number is smaller than three, which is the prescribed number of bets.

  On the other hand, when the sub-side MPU 82 is in the first AT state, as described above, when winning is made in any of IV = 1 to 6, the stop order for establishing the corresponding bell winning is notified. Then, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in accordance with the notified stop order, the first bell winning or the second bell winning is established. The number of medals paid out when the first bell winning is established is nine, and the number of medals paid out when the second bell winning is established is four. These numbers are more than three, which is the prescribed number of bets. Accordingly, the number of medals paid out per unit game increases when the sub-side MPU 82 is in the first AT state than when it is in the non-AT state.

  Incidentally, when the sub MPU 82 is in a state in which the control for AT is executed, when winning is won with IV = 1 to 2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the corresponding bell winning is as follows. The second AT state is set in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the bell winning is not notified when winning is made at any of IV = 3 to 6, although it is notified. In the second AT state, compared to the first AT state, the number of medals to be paid out per unit game will be reduced, but even in the case of winning with IV = 1 to 2, the stop order for establishing a bell winning The number of medals paid out per unit game increases as compared to the non-AT state where no notification is made.

  In each lottery mode, the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as “replay probability”) of the winning combination that can establish a replay winning is about 1 / 6.3 in the normal mode ST1, whereas the first RT mode ST2 and the second RT mode. Each of ST3, additional RT mode ST4 and bonus RT mode ST5 is about 1 / 2.5. That is, even if the set value is the same, the replay probability is set in a plurality of stages. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the replay probability in accordance with the change of the lottery mode, and it is possible to generate a relatively advantageous state and an unfavorable state for the player using the change of the replay probability. .

  As described above, the first RT mode ST2, the second RT mode ST3, the additional RT mode ST4, and the bonus RT mode ST5 have the same replay probability and payout occurrence probability, but the second RT mode ST3 and the bonus RT mode ST5 The first RT mode ST2 and the additional RT mode ST4 are different from each other in that they do not trigger the transition to the first AT state, whereas the modes are the triggers for the transition to the 1AT state.

  When the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is satisfied, when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 becomes the bonus RT mode ST5, the control state in the sub MPU 82 becomes the first AT state and the gaming state becomes the bonus state. . In the bonus state, one run is completed when the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 reaches the end reference game number (for example, 20 games). When the continuation condition is satisfied in the bonus state, a new execution time is started after one execution time of the bonus state. In addition, in the bonus state, a condition for enabling the transition to the ART state, which will be described later, may be satisfied. When the condition for allowing the transition is satisfied, an opportunity to transition to the ART state occurs after the bonus state ends. .

  When the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is changed to the second RT mode ST3 when the conditions for enabling the transition to the ART state are satisfied, the control state in the sub MPU 82 becomes the first AT state and the gaming state becomes the ART state. . In the ART state, one run is completed when the number of continuing games reaches the end reference game number. In addition, an additional condition may be satisfied in the ART state, and when the additional condition is satisfied, the number of remaining continued games in the ART state increases.

  In the ART state, when the lottery mode of the main side MPU 72 becomes the additional RT mode ST4, the lottery mode of the main side MPU 72 is the additional RT mode ST4, and the control state of the sub MPU 82 is the additional state in which the control state is the first AT state. Will migrate. The added state ends when the number of continued games in the added state reaches the end reference game number, and returns to the ART state. In the added state, the probability that the added condition is satisfied is higher than that in the ART state, and when the added condition is satisfied, the number of remaining continued games in the ART state that are restored after the added state ends. .

  As described above, in the configuration in which the game state may be shifted in relation to the lottery mode of the main MPU 72, the first RT mode ST2 is promoted from the normal mode ST1, and the second RT mode ST3 is promoted from the first RT mode ST2. Then, the added RT mode ST4 is promoted from the second RT mode ST3. Further, the bonus RT mode ST5 is promoted from any one of the normal mode ST1, the first RT mode ST2, and the second RT mode ST3.

  On the other hand, only fall from the added RT mode ST4 to the second RT mode ST3 occurs, only fall from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2, and fall from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1. Only occurs. Further, only the fall from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1 occurs.

  The transition to the lottery mode occurs when a replay winning corresponding to promotion or a replay winning corresponding to falling is established. Hereinafter, these replay winnings will be described in detail.

<Mode of promotion and fall with respect to the bonus status>
As shown in FIGS. 11, 16, and 18, the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table have winning data other than the normal replay winning data as IV = 11-14. In addition, first special replay winning data and second special replay winning data are set. The probability of winning any one of IV = 11 to 14 is the same in the normal mode ST1, the first RT mode ST2, and the second RT mode ST3. Specifically, the winning probability is about 1 / 22.9. In addition, when winning is achieved at any of IV = 11 to 14, as described above with reference to the normal mode lottery table, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding stop order, Either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established (see FIGS. 12, 17, and 19). When the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5.

  Reel 32L for establishing either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning when the winning condition is established in any of IV = 11 to 14 in the situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is established , 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, when the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is established, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, so that either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved. Can be established. Then, in the situation where the transition to the bonus state is established, either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5. As described, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state.

  Further, in the situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is established, when winning is won at any of IV = 11 to 14, not only the notification of the stop order but also “red” in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. 7 ”An effect that motivates the user to stop and display the symbol is executed. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in accordance with the notified stop order, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at a timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be stopped on the subline SL4, The stop control is executed so that the establishment of the first special replay winning is given priority over the two special replay winning. This makes it possible to generate an opportunity for the three “red 7” symbols to be stopped and displayed on a straight line when shifting to the bonus state.

  In the bonus RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 20, the same winning data as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set to IV = 7-10. Each winning probability of IV = 7 to 10 is the same as the winning probability of the corresponding IV value in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). In the bonus state, when winning is made at any of IV = 7 to 10 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode, the number of times of winning the bonus state (IV = 1 to 6 is the winning criterion) Triggers to increase the number of executions in the ART state (one execution time until the number of continued games reaches the end reference game number) occurs. To do.

  In the bonus RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 20, first fall replay winning data is set as winning data for IV = 11 to 16, in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 2.6.

  In the bonus RT mode lottery table, when IV = 11 is won, as shown in FIG. 21, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel. In the case of 32R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay winning is irrespective of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It occurs reliably. Also, when winning is won at IV = 12, the normal replay winning is indicated by each stop button when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when winning is won with IV = 13, the normal replay winning is indicated by each stop button when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when winning is won with IV = 14, the first replay is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when IV = 15 is won, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When winning is won at IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1.

  If the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 is the first AT state and the gaming state is a bonus state, it is possible to establish a normal replay winning even if winning is selected in any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode ST5. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the notified stop order, thereby avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning a prize, and the lottery mode is set even if IV = 11 to 16 is won. It is possible to prevent the transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1.

  Here, even in a situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is not satisfied and the stop order is not notified by the image display device 66, in the normal mode ST1, the first RT mode ST2, or the second RT mode ST3. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a corresponding stop order with any of IV = 11 to 14, either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established, and the lottery mode Will shift to the bonus RT mode ST5. In this case, the main MPU 72 executes the lottery process for the combination in a manner corresponding to the bonus RT mode ST5, so that the replay probability is higher than in the situation of the normal mode ST1. However, since the control in the first AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, even if IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stop order notification for establishing the bell winning is not executed. Further, even if the winning combination is any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table, the stop order for establishing the normal replay winning is not notified. And in the situation where the said stop order is not alert | reported, the probability which becomes the stop order which establishes a 1st fall replay winning prize is 5/6. Then, the first fall replay winning will be established with a high probability, and the lottery mode will shift to the normal mode ST1. Thereby, even if the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 occurs even if the conditions for enabling the transition to the bonus state are not satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to receive the profit.

  When the sub-side MPU 82 is in neither the first AT state nor the second AT state and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. The player is penalized as a penalty event occurs. Then, in a situation where neither the bonus state nor the ART state is in addition and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified by the image display device 66, the player is set as the first stop unless an operation error is made. It is considered that the left reel 32L is stopped. On the other hand, the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L as the first stop is not set in the stop order for establishing either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning. As a result, the possibility that the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 under a situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is not satisfied is reduced.

  In the situation where the bonus is in the bonus RT mode ST5 and the winning combination is any of IV = 11 to 16, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning. However, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the stop order due to an operation error or the like, the lottery mode may shift from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1. Become. However, even in this case, the first AT state in the sub MPU 82 is maintained, and the gaming state is also maintained in the bonus state. In other words, the replay probability is reduced to the probability corresponding to the normal mode ST1, but when winning is won in any of IV = 1 to 6, the stop order for establishing the bell winning is notified. It becomes. In the situation of the bonus mode and the normal mode ST1, when the winning is made in any of IV = 11 to 14, the stop order for establishing either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is set. Informed. When either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established, the state is returned to the bonus state and the bonus RT mode ST5. However, in this case, a motivating effect to stop and display the “white 7” symbol is not executed.

<Mode of promotion and fall about the relationship with ART state>
As described above, in the normal mode lottery table, first RT replay winning data is set as winning data for IV = 15 to 18 in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 11). The probability of winning one of these IV = 15-18 is about 1 / 1.10. Then, when winning is made at any of IV = 15 to 18, as shown in FIG. 12, the stopping order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is won. When the stop order corresponding to the combination is reached, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode ST1 to the first RT mode ST2.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 16, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data for IV = 15 to 18 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these IV = 15-18 is about 1 / 1.10. When winning is won at IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 17, the second RT is when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when winning is won with IV = 16, the second RT replay winning is each stop when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The button 42 to 44 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when winning is won with IV = 17, the second RT replay winning is each stop when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The button 42 to 44 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when winning is won with IV = 18, the second RT replay winning is each stop when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The button 42 to 44 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In the first RT mode ST2, the winning order is any of IV = 15 to 18, and the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponds to the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. In such a case, the second RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3.

  If the conditions for enabling the transition to the ART state are satisfied, and if the winning is made in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode ST1, the stop order for establishing the first RT replay winning is the image display device 66. Will be informed. In addition, when the condition for enabling the transition to the ART state is satisfied, if the winning is made in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode ST2, the stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning is shown in the image. Notification is given by the display device 66. As a result, when the condition for enabling the transition to the ART state is established, the first RT replay winning can be established by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the notified stop order. The second RT replay winning can be established. Then, in a situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the ART state is established, the second RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode transitions to the second RT mode ST3, so that the gaming state transitions to the ART state as already described.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the second RT mode lottery table, first special replay winning data and second special replay winning data are set as winning data at IV = 15 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning this IV = 15 is about 1/3280. In the second RT mode lottery table, when IV = 15 is won, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is performed. In other cases, a normal replay winning is established.

  Stop in the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning if the winning state is IV = 15 in the state of the ART state and the second RT mode ST3 The order is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, in the ART state and the second RT mode ST3, either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notified stop order. Can be established. Then, in the ART state, when either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established and the lottery mode is added and the RT mode ST4 is shifted to, the gaming state shifts to the adding state.

  Also, when the winning state is IV = 15 in the state of the second RT mode ST3 in the ART state, not only the stop order notification but also the “white 7” symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. An effect that is motivating to perform is performed. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at a timing at which the “white 7” symbol can be stopped only on the subline SL1 or on both the subline SL1 and the subline SL5. When the stop operation is performed, stop control is executed in the reel control process (FIG. 13) so that the establishment of the first special replay winning is given priority over the second special replay winning. This makes it possible to generate an opportunity for the three “white 7” symbols to be stopped and displayed on a straight line when shifting to the added state.

  In the extra RT mode lottery table, although not shown, the same winning data as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set to IV = 1 to 10. In this case, the winning probabilities for IV = 1 to 7 are the same as in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). On the other hand, each winning probability of IV = 8-10 is set higher than the winning probability of the corresponding IV value in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). Specifically, in the added RT mode ST4, only the roles that can be replayed are IV = 8 to 10, and the probability of winning in any of IV = 8 to 10 is set to about 1 / 2.5. ing. As a result, in the extra RT mode ST4, the probability that the bell replay winning, the first cherry replay winning, and the second cherry replay winning are achieved is increased. In the added state and the added RT mode ST4, if any of the bell replay winning, the first cherry replay winning and the second cherry replay winning is achieved, the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state is added. Will be.

  Incidentally, the winning probabilities of IV = 8 to 10 are set so that the winning probabilities decrease in the order of IV = 8 → IV = 9 → IV = 10. In this case, when the winning combination with a low winning probability is won, the additional number of continuous games to be selected is increased or increased more easily than when the winning combination with a high winning probability is won.

  As described above, the added state ends when the number of continued games in the added state becomes the end reference game number, and returns to the ART state. In this case, the lottery mode shifts from the additional RT mode ST4 to the second RT mode ST3. Further, the transition from the additional RT mode ST4 to a mode different from the second RT mode ST3 does not occur. Therefore, a combination for shifting the lottery mode is not set in the extra RT mode lottery table. That is, only the combination of IV = 1 to 10 is set in the addition mode lottery table, and no other combination is set.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 18, the same winning data as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set to IV = 7-10. Each winning probability of IV = 7 to 10 is the same as the winning probability of the corresponding IV value in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). In the ART state, when a winning is made at any of IV = 7 to 10 in the second RT mode lottery table, an opportunity to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state occurs. The same winning data as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set for IV = 7 to 10, and IV = 7 to 10 corresponds to the winning probabilities in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). The same is true for the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) in that it is the same as the IV value win probability.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 18, second fall replay winning data is set as winning data for IV = 16 to 21 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these IV = 16-21 is about 1/197.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, when IV = 16 is won, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel. In the case of 32R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning is regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. It occurs reliably. When winning is won at IV = 17, the first replay is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. Regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, it occurs reliably, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When winning is won with IV = 18, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. Regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, it occurs reliably, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when winning is won with IV = 19, the normal replay winning is indicated by each stop button when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, it occurs reliably, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, when winning is won with IV = 20, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. Regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, it occurs reliably, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when IV = 21 is won, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, it occurs reliably, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2.

  If the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 is the first AT state and the gaming state is the ART state, the normal replay winning can be established even if the winning is made in any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode ST3. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the notified stop order, so that the establishment of the second fall replay winning is avoided, and the lottery mode is set even if the winning is achieved in any of IV = 16 to 21. It is possible to prevent the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST1.

  Here, even if the conditions for enabling the transition to the ART state are not satisfied and the stop order is not notified by the image display device 66, it is won at any of IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode ST1. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding stop order, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2. Further, even if the conditions for enabling the transition to the ART state are not satisfied and the stop order is not notified by the image display device 66, it is won at any of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode ST2. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding stop order, the second RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3. In this case, the main MPU 72 executes the lottery process for the winning combination in a manner corresponding to the first RT mode ST2 or the second RT mode ST3, so that the replay probability is higher than the situation in the normal mode ST1. However, since the control in the first AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, even if IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stop order notification for establishing the bell winning is not executed. Further, even if IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table is won, the stop order for establishing the normal replay winning is not notified, and further IV = in the first RT mode lottery table. Even if the player wins any of 19 to 24, the stop order for establishing the normal replay winning is not notified. And in the situation where these stop orders are not informed, the probability of the stop order for establishing the first fall replay prize or the second fall replay prize is 5/6. Then, the first fall replay winning and the second falling replay winning are established with high probability, and the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1. Thereby, even if the condition for enabling the transition to the ART state is not satisfied, even if the transition to the second RT mode ST3 occurs, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to receive the profit.

  As described above, the middle reel 32M or the right reel is set as the first stop in the situation where the sub-side MPU 82 is neither in the first AT state nor the second AT state and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified. Stopping 32R penalizes the player as a penalty event occurs. Then, in a situation where neither the bonus state nor the ART state is in addition and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified by the image display device 66, the player is set as the first stop unless an operation error is made. It is considered that the left reel 32L is stopped. On the other hand, the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L as the first stop is not set in the stop order for establishing the first RT replay winning and the stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning. As a result, the possibility that the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2 and the second RT mode ST3 under the condition where the condition for enabling the transition to the ART state is not satisfied is reduced. In particular, in order to shift to the second RT mode ST3, it is not enough to establish the first RT replay winning in the normal mode ST1, and it is necessary to establish the second RT replay winning in the first RT mode ST2. In this regard, it is possible to reduce the probability that the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 in a situation where the conditions for enabling the transition to the ART state are not satisfied.

  When one execution time in the ART state is completed, even if the remaining execution times in the ART state are one or more, when winning in any of IV = 16 to 21 in the situation of the second RT mode ST3 In addition, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for avoiding the establishment of the second falling replay winning is not notified. In this case, the second fall replay winning is established with high probability, and when the second falling replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 16, first fall replay winning data is set as winning data for IV = 19 to 24 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these IV = 19 to 24 is about 1 / 10.9.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, when IV = 19 is won, as shown in FIG. 17, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel. In the case of 32R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay winning is irrespective of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It occurs reliably. In addition, when IV = 20 is won, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the winning combination is IV = 21, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When winning is won at IV = 22, the normal replay winning is indicated by each stop button when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When winning is won at IV = 23, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if winning is won with IV = 24, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first drop replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1 as already described.

  When one execution time in the ART state is completed and the remaining execution times in the ART state is 0, when winning is performed in any of IV = 19 to 24 in the situation of the first RT mode ST2. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding establishment of the first fall replay winning is not notified. In this case, the first fall replay winning is established with high probability, and when the first falling replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1. As a result, the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, if one execution time in the ART state is completed and the remaining execution times in the ART state is one or more, the winning state is selected in any of IV = 19 to 24 in the situation of the first RT mode ST2. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified. In addition, if one execution time in the ART state is completed and the remaining execution times in the ART state is one or more times, the winning state is IV = 15 to 18 in the situation of the first RT mode ST2. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second RT replay winning is notified. When the second RT replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3, and a new execution time of the ART state is started.

  That is, when one execution time in the ART state is completed in a situation where the remaining execution times in the ART state is one or more times, a new execution time in the ART state is not immediately started, but in the second RT mode. When the lottery mode transition of ST3 → first RT mode ST2 → second RT mode ST3 occurs, a new execution of the ART state is started. As a result, it is possible to generate a period that continues for a predetermined number of games between one execution time of the ART state and the next execution time, and a new execution time of the ART state is started during the period. Can be expected from the player.

  In addition, even if one execution time of the ART state is completed in the situation where the remaining execution times of the ART state are one or more as described above, the lottery mode is temporarily dropped to the first RT mode ST2, and then the first When the promotion to the 2RT mode ST3 occurs, a new execution time of the ART state is started, so that a new execution time of the ART state can be started upon the transition to the second RT mode ST3. It becomes. Although the details will be described later, the start and end of the ART state is managed by the sub-side MPU 82 instead of the main-side MPU 72. However, as described above, the new ART state is triggered by the transition to the second RT mode ST3. By starting a proper execution time, it is possible to indirectly grasp the timing at which a new execution time in the ART state is started in the main MPU 72.

  Here, in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), a combination in which only normal replay winning data is set to IV = 25 is set. The probability of winning at IV = 25 is set to be higher than the probability of winning for other roles. Specifically, the winning is about 1 / 6.6. When winning is won at IV = 25, a normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), a combination in which only the normal replay winning data is set to IV = 22 is set. The probability of winning at IV = 22 is set higher than the probability of winning for other roles, and specifically, the winning is about 1 / 6.3. If the winning combination is IV = 22, a normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Although details will be described later, using the role of IV = 25 in the first RT mode ST2 and the role of IV = 22 in the second RT mode ST3, the transition to the normal mode ST1 is completed after one execution of the ART state is completed. In the period until the occurrence of the event or the new execution of the ART state is started, an effect for causing the player to predict that the new execution of the ART state is started is executed.

  By the way, as already described, in the situation where the state is the second RT mode ST3 in the ART state and the winning is made in any of IV = 16 to 21, the reel 32L for avoiding the second falling replay winning. , 32M, 32R are informed of the stop order, and if the winning state is IV = 19 to 24 in the state of the ART state and the first RT mode ST2, the first fall replay winning is established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for avoidance is notified. However, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the stop order due to an operation error or the like, the second RT mode ST3 is started. The transition to the first RT mode ST2 or the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 will occur.However, even in this case, the first AT state in the sub MPU 82 is maintained, and the gaming state is also maintained in the ART state. That is, even if the lottery mode becomes the first RT mode ST2, if the winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 6, the stop order for establishing the bell winning is notified. In addition, when the lottery mode becomes the normal mode ST1, the replay probability decreases. However, when winning is made in any of IV = 1 to 6, the stop order for establishing the bell winning is set. Informed. In the state of the ART mode and the normal mode ST1, if the winning is made in any of IV = 15 to 18, the stop order for establishing the first RT replay winning is notified, and in the ART state In the situation where the first RT mode ST2 is set, if the winning is made in any of IV = 15 to 18, the stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning is notified. When the second RT replay winning is established, the state is returned to the ART state and the second RT mode ST3.

<Lottery mode transition process>
Processing contents for shifting the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 as described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the lottery mode transition process. The lottery mode transition process is executed in step S414 in the reel control process (FIG. 13).

  First, it is determined whether or not a condition for shifting to the bonus RT mode ST5 is established (step S601). In a situation where any one of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is set, either IV = 11 to 14 If it is a win and either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established, it is determined that the condition for shifting to the bonus RT mode ST5 is established.

  When the conditions for shifting to the bonus RT mode ST5 are satisfied, as a lottery table change process, the lottery table for bonus RT mode is read from the main ROM 73, and the read lottery table is currently stored in the main RAM 74. The lottery table corresponding to the lottery mode is overwritten in the area where the lottery table is read (step S602). As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5.

  If the condition for shifting to the bonus RT mode ST5 is established (step S601: YES), the value of the bell establishment counter provided in the main RAM 74 is “0” (step S603: YES). ), “1” is set to the bonus RT start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S604). The bell establishment counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the bonus state and the bonus state end timing are set, and a value of “20” corresponding to the establishment reference number is set at the start of the bonus state, Every time it is won at any of IV = 1-6, 1 is subtracted. The bonus RT start flag indicates that the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 has occurred in a situation where the value of the bell establishment counter is “0”, that is, in a situation where the management process of the bonus state is not executed in the main MPU 72. Is a flag for specifying the main MPU 72.

  In the lottery mode transition process, it is determined whether or not the promotion condition is satisfied in the normal mode ST1 (step S605). In the situation where the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set, the promotion condition is satisfied in the normal mode ST1 when winning is achieved at any of IV = 15 to 18 and the first RT replay winning is established. Is determined.

  When the promotion condition is satisfied in the normal mode ST1, as a lottery table change process, the first RT mode lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the read lottery table is read in the main RAM 74 as the current lottery table. The area in which the lottery table corresponding to the mode is read is overwritten (step S606). As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2.

  In the lottery mode transition process, it is determined whether or not the promotion condition is satisfied in the first RT mode ST2 (step S607). In the situation where the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is set, the promotion condition is established in the first RT mode ST2 when winning is achieved at any of IV = 15 to 18 and the second RT replay winning is established. It is determined that

  When the promotion condition is established in the first RT mode ST2, as a lottery table change process, the second RT mode lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the read lottery table is read in the main RAM 74 as the current condition. The lottery table corresponding to the lottery mode is overwritten in the area that has been read (step S608). As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3. After the lottery table is changed, “1” is set to the ART output start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S609). The ART output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that external output corresponding to the start of the second RT mode ST3 is to be performed.

  In the lottery mode transition process, it is determined whether or not the conditions for promotion to the additional RT mode ST4 are satisfied (step S610). In the situation where the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18) is set, if IV = 15 is won and either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established, the additional RT mode ST4 is entered. It is determined that the promotion condition is satisfied.

  When the conditions for promotion to the additional RT mode ST4 are satisfied, the lottery table for the additional RT mode is read from the main ROM 73 as the lottery table change process, and the read lottery table is currently stored in the main RAM 74. The lottery table corresponding to the lottery mode is overwritten in the area where the lottery table is read (step S611). As a result, the lottery mode is added and the mode shifts to the RT mode ST4.

  In the lottery mode transition process, it is determined whether or not the falling condition is satisfied (step S612). In the situation where the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is set, it is determined that the falling condition is satisfied when the winning combination is established at any of IV = 19 to 24 and the first falling replay winning is established. . In addition, in the situation where the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is set, the falling condition is also satisfied when the winning combination is established at any of IV = 16 to 21 and the second falling replay winning is established. Is determined. Further, it is determined that the falling condition is also satisfied when the number of continuing games reaches the end reference game number (for example, 20 games) in the situation where the extra RT mode lottery table is set. Further, in the situation where the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is set, the falling condition is also satisfied when the winning combination is established at any of IV = 11 to 16 and the first falling replay winning is established. Is determined.

  When any of the falling conditions is satisfied, as the lottery table change processing, the transfer destination lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the read lottery table is changed to the current lottery mode in the main RAM 74. The area in which the corresponding lottery table is read is overwritten (step S613). Specifically, when the falling condition is satisfied in the first RT mode ST2, the normal mode lottery table is read, and when the falling condition is satisfied in the second RT mode ST3, the first RT mode lottery table is read and added RT. When the fall condition is satisfied in the mode ST4, the second RT mode lottery table is read, and when the fall condition is satisfied in the bonus RT mode ST5, the normal mode lottery table is read. Thereby, it will transfer to the lottery mode of a fall destination.

<Cyclic processing>
Next, periodic processing executed periodically (for example, at a period of 2 msec) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the periodic processing, when a new command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S701: YES), the command received this time is stored in the ring buffer provided in the sub RAM 84 (step S702). The ring buffer is a buffer that can store a plurality of commands. When a command is written to the area indicated by the write pointer, the write pointer is updated and read each time the write processing is executed. A process for reading a command from the area indicated by the pointer is executed, and the read pointer is updated each time the read process is executed. Note that the update of the read pointer is performed when the periodic processing of the next processing time is started when the command is read out in one processing time of the periodic processing.

  In the periodic processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT state counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is “0” (step S703). The AT state counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the sub MPU 82 is in the AT state and, in the AT state, specifying the stay mode in the AT state. When in the non-AT state, the value of the AT state counter is “0”, and when in the AT state, the value of the AT state counter is 1 or more.

  When the value of the AT state counter is “0” (step S703: YES), non-AT processing for performing non-AT state execution control is executed (step S704). On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter is 1 or more (step S703: NO), an in-AT process for performing execution control of the AT state (first AT state or second AT state) is executed (step S705).

  When the process of step S704 is executed, or when the process of step S705 is executed, an effect data setting process is executed in step S706. In the effect data setting process, an effect according to the lottery result or winning result of each game, an effect indicating the AT state transition expectation, and an effect according to the progress status of the AT state are displayed on the upper lamp 64 and the speaker. 65 and processing to be performed by the image display device 66 are executed. Thereafter, this periodic process is terminated.

<Non-AT processing>
Next, non-AT processing executed in step S704 of the periodic processing (FIG. 23) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the non-AT processing, when a lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S801: YES), winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub RAM 84 (step S802).

  In the non-AT process, when a stop command command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S803: YES), the stop order data is stored on the sub-side to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game. Writing to the RAM 84 (step S804).

  In the non-AT processing, when a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S805: YES), it is determined whether a penalty event has occurred. The penalty event is an event in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as a first stop in the non-AT state (a state where the value of the AT state counter is “0”) and any winning occurs. is there. When a penalty event occurs, there is a possibility that the actual medal grant rate is higher than the medal grant rate in the non-AT state set in the design stage of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, a disadvantage is given to the player so as to prompt the stop of the left reel 32L as a first stop during the non-AT state.

  When a penalty event occurs, penalty display data is set in the effect data setting process (step S706) in the periodic process (FIG. 23), and penalty sound data is set. . This notifies the player that a penalty event has occurred.

  When a penalty event occurs, an addition process to a penalty counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is executed (step S807). In the addition process, “5”, which is a value corresponding to the number of penalty games, is added to the value of the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition to the AT state is delayed by the value of the penalty counter. Thereafter, the non-AT processing is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S806, a transition chance management process is executed in step S808, and a ceiling game management process is executed in step S809. Then, after performing the winning correspondence processing in step S810, the non-AT processing is terminated.

  In the transition chance management process (step S808), on the condition that the penalty counter value in the sub RAM 84 is “0”, the current game is in the normal mode ST1 and the combination lottery process (FIG. 10) performs IV = It is determined whether or not the winning is made in any of 7-10. In the normal mode ST1, when the winning is made at any of IV = 7 to 10, the transition to the AT state lottery process is executed. The lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is the normal mode ST1 and the control state of the sub MPU 82 is the non-AT state. For example, in the situation where the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is one of the first RT mode ST2, the second RT mode ST3, the added RT mode ST4, and the bonus RT mode ST5 in spite of being in the non-AT state, In FIG. 10), even if IV = 7-10, the winning lottery process for shifting to the AT state is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the lottery process for shifting to the AT state from being executed in a situation where the lottery mode stays in a mode different from the normal mode ST1 triggered by the occurrence of a penalty event.

  In the AT state transition lottery process, the AT transition lottery table corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub ROM 83, and is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub RAM 84. The counter value is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the AT shift lottery table. In the AT transfer lottery table, if the winner is IV = 7, the AT shift is won with a probability of 5%. If the winner is IV = 8, the AT shift is won with a probability of 10%. IV = If 9 is won, AT transition is won with a probability of 15%, and if IV = 10 is won, AT transition is won with a probability of 20%.

  If the AT transition winning lottery process is performed in the AT state, a distribution lottery process for determining whether the game state of the transition destination is the bonus state or the ART state is executed. In the distribution lottery process, a common lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83 for all IV = 7 to 10, and the sub-side lottery counter is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side RAM 84. And the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the distribution lottery table. The distribution lottery table is set so that a bonus state winning is achieved with a probability of 80% and an ART state winning is performed with a probability of 20%.

  When the bonus state is won, “1” is set in the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the in-AT process (step S705) in the next periodic process (FIG. 23) and executes the bonus preparation state process (step S906) described later in the in-AT process (FIG. 25). It becomes. On the other hand, when the ART state is won, “3” is set in the AT state counter of the sub-RAM 84. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the in-AT process (step S705) in the next periodic process (FIG. 23) and the ART preparation state process (step S908) described later in the in-AT process (FIG. 25). It becomes.

  Note that if the AT transition is selected in the AT state lottery process, the game is not limited to the configuration in which the AT state is transferred to the AT state. In the case of winning the transition, the transition to the AT state may be performed after a predetermined number of precursor games (for example, 32 games) has been consumed. In this case, the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 execute an effect that can cause the player to expect a transition to the AT state in each game where the number of precursor games is being measured. Thus, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation.

  In the game number release management process (step S809), a bonus is given when the game for the number of released games set when the bonus state or ART state was completed last time is digested without causing a new transition to the bonus state. Execute the process to shift to the state. That is, every time a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, the value of the number of released games is decremented by 1. When the remaining number of released games is “0”, the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “ 1 ”is set. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the in-AT process (step S705) in the next periodic process (FIG. 23) and executes the bonus preparation state process (step S906) described later in the in-AT process (FIG. 25). It becomes.

  When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, even if the game is consumed, only the value of the penalty counter is subtracted, and the number of released games is not consumed. Further, when the remaining number of released games is 32 or less, a precursor state is established, and a precursor effect is executed by the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 over the remaining number of games.

  In the winning correspondence processing (step S810), processing for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of winning is output through the speaker 65. Execute the process to make it.

<Processing during AT>
Next, the AT processing executed in step S705 of the periodic processing (FIG. 23) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the AT process, when a stop command command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S901: YES), the stop order data is stored on the sub-side in order to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game. Write to the RAM 84 (step S902).

  In the AT processing, when a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S903: YES), winning correspondence processing is executed (step S904). In the winning correspondence process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is output through the speaker 65. To execute the process.

  In the AT process, the value of the AT state counter in the sub RAM 84 is grasped in step S905. As already described, the AT state counter is a counter for specifying whether the sub-side MPU 82 is in the non-AT state or the AT state, and the sub-side MPU 82 specifies the stay mode in the AT state. Counter.

  As processing executed in the sub MPU 82 in the AT state, bonus preparation state processing (step S906) for performing execution control of the bonus preparation state and bonus state processing (step S907) for performing execution control of the bonus state. And ART preparation state processing (step S908) for performing ART preparation state execution control, ART state processing (step S909) for performing ART state execution control, and ART end branch state execution control. ART end branch processing (step S910) and an added state processing (step S911) for performing execution control of the added state are set.

  In such a processing configuration, the sub-side MPU 82 specifies which one of the plurality of types of processing should be executed from the value of the AT state counter. For such specification, an AT address table provided in the sub-side ROM 83 is referred to. In the AT address table, a start address of a program for executing the above-described plural types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the AT state counter. Hereinafter, the processing content for executing and controlling each gaming state will be described in detail.

<Bonus preparation status processing>
The bonus preparation state process executed in step S906 of the in-AT process (FIG. 25) in the sub MPU 82 will be described.

  The bonus preparation state is a state in which the user stays before the transition to the bonus state when the conditions for enabling the transition to the bonus state are satisfied. In the bonus preparation state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for enabling the establishment of a bell winning when winning is won at any of IV = 1 to 2 on condition that the penalty state is not in preparation. Is notified, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning is not notified even if the winning is made at any of IV = 3 to 6. In the bonus preparation state, IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), or the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) (hereinafter, Stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning when it is won in the bonus opportunity corresponding role (hereinafter referred to as a bonus opportunity stop) (Also referred to as an order). This state is the second AT state of the sub-side MPU 82 already described. The transition to the bonus state occurs when the bonus preparation state process is executed in the sub-side MPU 82 and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order in which the bonus opportunity support role is won and the bonus opportunity support stop sequence is executed. To do.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing bonus preparation state processing. In the bonus preparation state process, it is determined whether or not a penalty event has occurred during the bonus preparation state (step S1001). In the penalty event in the bonus preparation state, the normal RT lottery table (FIG. 11) wins at any of IV = 15 to 18 and the first RT replay winning is established, the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). ) Of IV = 15 to 18 and won the second RT replay winning, and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) becomes IV and wins the first special replay winning and the second special. This includes that one of the replay winnings has been established. In the bonus preparation state, even if the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72 is the above lottery result, the stop order for shifting the lottery mode is not notified. The winning results for shifting to the lottery mode do not occur unless the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. That is, each of the above events is an event that occurs when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop even though the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified. The event is set as a penalty event during the bonus preparation state.

  In addition, the penalty event in the bonus preparation state includes that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stop order corresponding to the bonus trigger when the bonus trigger corresponding role is won. In the bonus preparation state, if the bonus opportunity support role is won, the image display device 66 will notify the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity, but the bonus opportunity response is executed despite the notification being executed. An event in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stop order is a penalty event during the bonus preparation state.

  If a penalty event in the bonus preparation state has occurred (step S1001: YES), “1” is set to the preparation penalty flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1002). The in-preparation penalty flag is a flag for the sub MPU 82 to specify that a penalty event has occurred during the bonus preparation state or the ART preparation state. Note that the preparation penalty flag is cleared to “0” when the bonus preparation state is shifted to the bonus state.

  In the bonus preparation state process, when a lottery result command indicating that the winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 2 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1003: YES), the subordinate RAM 84 preparing penalty flag On the condition that “1” is not set to “No” (Step S1004: NO), stop order setting processing for bell winning is executed (Step S1005). In the stop order setting process for bell winning, data setting for notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is performed. As a result, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning a prize until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. In this way, by informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning at the time of winning of IV = 1 to 2 in the bonus preparation state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected number of medals per unit game in the bonus preparation state as compared to the normal gaming state in which the stop order notification for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is not executed.

  In the bonus preparation state process, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the fall target combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72. The drop target combination is IV = 19-24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), IV = 16-21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), and the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20). ) In IV) is 11 to 16.

  When the lottery result command indicating that the winning combination is won (step S1006: YES), it is determined whether or not the situation should avoid the falling (step S1007). When one of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is won and one of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is won. If “1” is not set in the preparing penalty flag of the sub-side RAM 84, it is determined that the fall should be avoided, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1007. For example, when the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is satisfied in the ART state, the bonus preparation state can be entered in the first RT mode ST2 or the second RT mode ST3. On the condition that “1” is not set, it is determined that the situation should avoid falling to the normal mode ST1 side.

  On the other hand, if any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won, whether or not “1” is set in the preparing penalty flag of the sub-RAM 84 is determined. Regardless, a negative determination is made in step S1007. In the bonus RT mode ST5, it is assumed that a transition is made to the bonus preparation state. In this case, in order to generate a trigger for transition to the bonus state, the lottery mode needs to be temporarily shifted from the bonus RT mode ST5 to another mode. Accordingly, the situation in which any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won does not correspond to a situation where a fall should be avoided regardless of the state of the penalty flag being prepared.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, stop order setting processing for fall prevention is executed (step S1008). In the stop order setting process for fall prevention, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning if the winning condition is any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). The data setting for notifying is performed. In addition, in the stop order setting process for avoiding the fall, in the situation where any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is won, a normal replay winning can be established. Data setting for informing the stop order is performed. In these cases, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the stop for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the order notification is started. Thus, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning is notified, thereby avoiding the fall from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 and the fall from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1. It becomes possible. In particular, by avoiding the fall to the normal mode ST1, it is possible to maintain a high replay probability even in the bonus preparation state when the ART state shifts to the bonus preparation state.

  When the bonus RT mode ST5 is shifted to the bonus preparation state, if any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won, the lottery mode actively falls to the normal mode ST1. Therefore, the stop order for establishing the first fall replay winning may be notified.

  In the bonus preparation state process, when a lottery result command indicating that the bonus opportunity corresponding role is won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1009: YES), a bonus order stop order setting process is executed (step S1009: YES). Step S1010). In the stop order setting process for bonus transition, data setting for informing the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity is performed. As a result, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the notification of the stop order corresponding to the bonus trigger is started. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled. In this way, by informing the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity, in the bonus preparation state, it becomes possible to establish either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning at the time of winning the bonus opportunity corresponding role. .

  In the bonus preparation state process, when a winning result command indicating that the game has been won for the bonus trigger role is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1011: YES), the reels 32L are arranged in the stop order corresponding to the bonus trigger. , 32M and 32R are stopped (step S1012: YES), “2” is set in the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1013). Thereby, the sub-side MPU 82 executes bonus state processing (step S907) described later in the next AT processing (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the bonus preparation state to the bonus state.

<Bonus status>
Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 in order to perform execution control of the bonus state will be described. In the bonus state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is notified when winning is won at any of IV = 1 to 6. In addition, as described above, in the bonus state, when the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 reaches the end reference game number (for example, 20 games), one execution time ends. When the continuation condition is satisfied in the bonus state, a new execution time is started after one execution time of the bonus state. In addition, in the bonus state, a condition for enabling the transition to the ART state may be satisfied. When the condition for allowing the transition is satisfied, an opportunity to transition to the ART state occurs after the bonus state ends.

  The manner in which the bonus state is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a) show the execution period of the bonus state, and FIGS. 27 (b) and 28 (b) show the execution period of the game won in any of IV = 1-6. 27 (c) and FIG. 28 (c) show the execution period of the game won by either IV = 7 to 10, and FIG. 27 (d) and FIG. 28 (d) show the continuous lottery process. 27 (e) and FIG. 28 (e) show the continuation chance period, FIG. 27 (f) and FIG. 28 (f) show the execution period of the off effect, and FIG. 27 (g) and FIG. 28 (g) shows the execution period of the continuous generation effect.

  First, a case where the bonus condition continuation condition is not satisfied in the middle of the bonus state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  At the timing of t1, the bonus state is started as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), a game won by any of IV = 1 to 6 is performed, and a period of t4 to t5, In each of the period from t7 to t8 and the period from t9 to t10, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), a game won by any of IV = 7 to 10 is performed. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the bell winning is notified in the game won in any of IV = 1 to 6. Further, in the game won in any of IV = 1 to 6, the remaining end reference game number is subtracted.

  On the other hand, in each of the games won by IV = 7-10, the continuous lottery process is executed (timing t5, timing t8, and timing t10) as shown in FIG. In the continuous lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to generate an opportunity to newly start one execution of the bonus state. However, in the game in which the continuous lottery process is executed, the result of the lottery process is not notified to the player.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, a game that is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 in a situation where the value of the remaining end reference game number is “1” is started. In this case, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on which stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is waited, and the continuation chance period is executed in the standby state. In the continuation chance period, if a continuous lottery process is performed in the current bonus state or a bonus state before that, and there is a notification trigger event for which the lottery result has not been notified, the notification trigger The result of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the event is notified to the player using the unit effects in the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The result of the continuous lottery process is executed in the unit effect for the notification trigger event corresponding to the result of losing, and the result of the continuous lottery process is continuously generated in the unit effect for the notification trigger event corresponding to the result of the continuous winning lottery. Is executed.

  In detail, in the case of FIG. 27, at the timing of t11 when the winning game is started in any of IV = 1 to 6, a continuation chance period is started as shown in FIG. At each of the timing, the timing of t13, the timing of t14, and the timing of t15, a unit effect in which an outlier effect is executed is started as shown in FIG. This time, the result of the continuous lottery process is a situation where four notification trigger events corresponding to the result of the continuous losing are stored. Therefore, the unit effect in which the off effect is executed is repeated four times. Then, at the timing t16 after the unit effect in which the off effect is executed four times, the continuation chance period ends as shown in FIG. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will execute the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the current game is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 27B, the final game in the bonus state is finished. And since the continuation condition of a bonus state is not materialized this time, the bonus state is complete | finished as shown to Fig.27 (a) at the timing of t18.

  Next, the case where the bonus condition continuation condition is satisfied in the middle of the bonus state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  As in the case of FIG. 27, at the timing of t11, in the situation where the value of the remaining end reference game number is “1”, a game that is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 is started. Then, in a state where the rotation start of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on which stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is awaited, as shown in FIG. Is started.

  Then, after the unit effect in which the off effect is executed as shown in FIG. 28 (f) at the timing of t12, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, the timing shown in FIG. 28 (g) is started. As shown, the unit effect in which the continuous generation effect is executed is started. In other words, this time, three notification trigger events corresponding to the result of the continuation lottery process are stored, and the order in which the unit effects are executed after the notification trigger events is the subsequent lottery. The processing result is a situation in which one notification trigger event corresponding to the continuous winning result is stored. Therefore, after the unit effect in which the off effect is executed is repeated three times, the unit effect in which the continuously generated effect is executed is executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, the continuation chance period ends as shown in FIG. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will execute the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the current game is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t17, the final game in the bonus state is finished as shown in FIG. Since the continuation condition of the bonus state is satisfied this time, the bonus state is continued as it is without ending.

  As described above, in the bonus state, the continuous lottery process is executed in response to the winning of IV = 7-10. The result of the continuous lottery process is not immediately notified, but in the final game in the bonus state, stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the current game is executed. A continuous chance period that occurs in a state where the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is awaited is ensured, and the result of the continuous lottery process is individually notified during the continuous chance period. As a result, when the bonus state ends, a continuation chance period in which the lottery results of the continuation lottery process are collectively notified can occur, so it is possible to generate a period in which the player's expectation is increased in the bonus state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a storage area of the main RAM 74 used by the main MPU 72 to execute the continuation chance period.

  The main-side RAM 74 stores a result / non-permission result first storage area 101a for storing a result of a continuous lottery process executed when winning is achieved with IV = 7 and a result / non-permission result first storage area 101a. A first determination number counter 101b for specifying the number of lottery result data which is lottery result data and is not a trigger for executing the unit effect in the main MPU 72, and is executed when winning is achieved with IV = 8. The result / non-permission result second storage area 102a for storing the result of the continuous lottery process, and the lottery result data stored in the result / non-confirmation result second storage area 102a and serving as a unit effect execution trigger And the result of the continuous lottery process executed when winning is won with IV = 9. The number of lottery result data that is not the trigger for execution of the unit effect that is the lottery result data stored in the third result storage area 103a and the third result storage area 103a. A third determination number counter 103b for performing, a result determination result fourth storage area 104a for storing the result of the continuous lottery process executed when winning is achieved with IV = 10, and a result determination result fourth storage area 104a The fourth determination number counter 104b for specifying the number of lottery result data stored in the main MPU 72 and the number of lottery result data that has not been triggered by the unit effect, and the first to fourth results of the success / failure results. The total number of lottery result data stored in the storage areas 101a to 104a and not triggering the execution of the unit effect is indicated by the main MPU. And spruce determination counter 105 for identifying at 2, are provided.

  As a result of the determination, each of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a has a data capacity of a plurality of bits, specifically, a data capacity of 4 bytes. However, it is not limited to this and may be 3 bytes or less, or 5 bytes or more. The lottery result data indicating the result of the continuous lottery process can be stored in each bit of the first / fourth storage areas 101a to 104a. Specifically, either “0” or “1” is set as binary data corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process in each bit of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a. In this case, the lottery result data indicating that the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result is “1”, and the lottery result data indicating that the result of the continuous lottery process is an outlier result is “0”.

  In each of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a, the order in which the lottery result data of the continuous lottery process is set is determined in advance, and the lottery results up to the bit in the nth order. When it is necessary to set new lottery result data in a situation where data is set, the new lottery result data is set to the bits in the (n + 1) th order. In this case, the (n + 1) th bit is set in the determination number counter corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a to which the current lottery result data is set in the first to fourth determination number counters 101b to 104b. It is a bit in the order of the value obtained by adding 1 to the existing value.

  As a result of the success / failure, in each of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a, the bits to be subjected to the unit effect are limited to the first order bits (for example, the bits present in the lower right position in FIG. 29). ing. When the lottery result data set in the first order bit becomes the execution target of the unit effect, the first to fourth determination number counters 101b to 104b become the targets for reading the current lottery result data. Shift processing is performed on each bit of the storage areas 101a to 104a. Specifically, a process of overwriting the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit with the mth bit is executed. The shift process is performed for all the bits in order from the bit with the earlier order of execution of the unit effects.

  The data set in the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a, the first to fourth determination number counters 101b to 104b, and the determination result number counter 105 are determined when one execution time of the bonus state is started and It is not cleared in the case of termination, and can be stored and held for a plurality of execution times of the bonus state. As will be described in detail later, when a unit effect is executed in which a continuous generation effect is executed during a continuous chance period in the bonus state, even if lottery result data that is not the target of the unit effect remains, After completion of the current execution times in the bonus state, a new execution time in the bonus state is started. In this case, the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect is directly transferred to the new execution time in the bonus state. Therefore, even if the continuous lottery process is not executed even once in the bonus state of the new execution times, the lottery result data for the inherited portion remains, so A continuation chance period occurs in the bonus state.

  In each of the first determination number counter 101b, the second determination number counter 102b, the third determination number counter 103b, and the fourth determination number counter 104b, the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a. In the configuration in which the number of stored lottery result data is stored, the values stored in the first to fourth determination number counters 101b to 104b are notified by the image display device 66 in the bonus state. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the notification image.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the number-of-times notification image G1 is displayed on the image display device 66 in the bonus state. The number notification image G1 includes an image indicating the value stored in the first determination number counter 101b (display content of “A = 1” in FIG. 30) and the value stored in the second determination number counter 102b. An image (display content of “B = 0” in FIG. 30), an image indicating a value stored in the third determination number counter 103b (display content of “C = 1” in FIG. 30), and a fourth determination An image indicating the value stored in the number counter 104b (display content “D = 1” in FIG. 30) is displayed.

  The display of the number-of-times notification image G1 is continuously performed over both the period before the continuation chance period and the continuation chance period in the bonus state. Specifically, the display of the number notification image G1 is started when the bonus state is started, and the display of the number notification image G1 is ended when the bonus state is ended. When the continuous lottery process is executed in a period before the continuous chance period in the bonus state, the value of the determination number counter 101b to 104b corresponding to the IV value that triggered the execution of the continuous lottery process is incremented by 1. As a result, 1 is added to the value of the display content corresponding to the determination number counters 101b to 104b that is the execution target of the 1 addition. In addition, in the continuous chance period in the bonus state, when the unit effect is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a that are the execution targets of the unit effect. Thus, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display content corresponding to the determination number counters 101b to 104b that is the execution target of the 1 subtraction. By displaying the number-of-times notification image G1 as described above, the game can be performed while recognizing the number of executions of the unit effect executed when the continuation chance period occurs in the period before the continuation chance period in the bonus state. It is possible to play a game while recognizing the number of executions of the remaining unit effects that can be executed during the continuation chance period.

<Bonus RT management process>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a bonus RT management process executed by the main MPU 72. The bonus RT management process is executed in step S211 which is a process timing after the reel control process in step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 9). That is, the bonus RT management process is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which stop control corresponding to the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is performed in one game is completed.

  In the bonus RT management process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the bonus RT start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1101). As described above, the bonus RT start flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 in the lottery mode transition process (FIG. 22). However, “1” is set to the bonus RT start flag on condition that the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 is performed in a situation where the value of the bell establishment counter in the main RAM 74 is “0”. The bell establishment counter is a counter for specifying on the main side MPU 72 whether or not the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 in the bonus state has reached the end reference game number. Then, a situation where the value of the bell establishment counter is 1 or more means that a bonus state is being established. Accordingly, the situation where the bonus RT start flag is set to “1” means that the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 has shifted to the bonus RT mode ST5 in a situation that is not in the bonus state.

  When “1” is set in the bonus RT start flag (step S1101: YES), “20” corresponding to the end reference game number is set in the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74, and the bonus RT start of the main RAM 74 is started. The flag is cleared to “0”, and “1” is set to the bonus RT flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1102). Thereafter, “1” is set to the bonus output start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1103). The bonus output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that external output corresponding to the start of the bonus RT mode ST5 should be performed.

  Note that when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 in a situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is not satisfied, the bonus lamp and the ART in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66, respectively. The execution of the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state that is not one of the states is continued.

  In the bonus RT management process, when “1” is set in the bonus RT flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1104: YES), IV = 7˜ in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) in this game. On the condition that one of the 10 is won (step S1105: YES), the continuous lottery table corresponding to the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S1106). Then, a continuous lottery process is executed (step S1107). In the continuous lottery process, the value of the main lottery counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the main RAM 74 is read, and the value of the main lottery counter is checked against the continuous lottery table. The continuous lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the values of IV = 7 to 10, and in the case of IV = 7, the continuous lottery process results in a continuous winning result with a probability of 10%. In the case of 8, a continuous winning result is obtained with a probability of 20% in the continuous lottery process. In the case of IV = 9, the continuous winning result is obtained with a probability of 30% in the continuous lottery process. Each continuous lottery table is set so that a continuous winning result is obtained with a probability of 40% in the lottery process.

  Here, as described above, the continuous lottery process is not always executed when winning at any of IV = 7 to 10, but is won at any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode ST5. It is executed only when When the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 due to the stop operation corresponding to the player's penalty event even though the sub MPU 82 is in the non-AT state, the first fall in the bonus RT mode ST5 The lottery mode immediately falls to the normal mode ST1 because the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the replay winning is not notified. In this case, the main lottery MPU 72 is executed in a situation where the gaming state is not in the bonus state by performing the continuous lottery process only when the winning RT mode ST5 is won in any of IV = 7-10. Even if the process after step S1105 in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) is executed, the probability that the continuous lottery process is executed in this situation can be lowered. And by reducing the probability that the continuous lottery process is executed in this way, the probability that a continuation chance period will occur in a situation where the gaming state is not the bonus state and the new execution times of the bonus state are continuously executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of being done.

  After the continuous lottery process (step S1107) is executed, the storage process of the continuous lottery result is executed (step S1108). In the continuous lottery result storage process, when the current continuous lottery process is executed with IV = 7, the first determination number of times in the first storage area 101a of the main RAM 74 is determined. A value of “0” or “1” corresponding to the result of the current continuous lottery process is set for the bit in the order obtained by adding 1 to the value of the counter 101b. Then, after setting the lottery result data, the value of the first determination number counter 101b is incremented by one. Further, when the current continuous lottery process is executed when IV = 8 is won, the value of the second determination number counter 102b is set to 1 in the second result storage area 102a of the main RAM 74. A value of “0” or “1” corresponding to the result of the current continuous lottery process is set for the added order bits. Then, after the lottery result data is set, the value of the second determination number counter 102b is incremented by one. When the current continuous lottery process is executed when IV = 9 is won, the value of the third determination number counter 103b is set to 1 in the third result storage area 103a of the main RAM 74. A value of “0” or “1” corresponding to the result of the current continuous lottery process is set for the added order bits. Then, after the lottery result data is set, the value of the third determination number counter 103b is incremented by one. Further, when the current continuous lottery process is executed when IV = 10 is won, the value of the fourth determination counter 104b is set to 1 in the fourth result storage area 104a of the main RAM 74. A value of “0” or “1” corresponding to the result of the current continuous lottery process is set for the added order bits. Then, after the lottery result data is set, the value of the fourth determination number counter 104b is incremented by one.

  In the bonus RT management process, if the current game is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 regardless of the type of lottery mode (step S1109: YES), regardless of whether or not a bell winning is achieved. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the bell establishment counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1110). In other words, if the main MPU 72 wins at any of IV = 1 to 6, the main MPU 72 decrements the remaining number of end reference games by 1 regardless of the current lottery mode and whether or not a bell winning is established. As a result, even if the lottery mode is intentionally shifted from the bonus RT mode ST5 or the establishment of the bell winning is avoided, it is impossible to prolong the state of continuing the bonus state. Is possible.

  If the value of the bell establishment counter after subtracting 1 is “0” (step S1111: YES), it means that the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 has reached the end reference game number. To do. In this case, an end branch process for determining a control state in the subsequent main MPU 72 is executed (step S1112). The processing content of the end branch processing will be described later.

<Bonus state processing>
Next, bonus state processing executed by the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bonus state process is executed in step S907 in the AT process (FIG. 25).

  In the bonus state process, when a lottery result command indicating that a winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 6 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1201: YES), a stop order setting process for a bell winning is performed. Execute (step S1202). In the stop order setting process for bell winning, data setting for notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is performed. As a result, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning a prize until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. In this way, by informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning at the time of winning of IV = 1 to 6 in the bonus state. Therefore, the expected number of medals per unit game in the bonus state is set to the bell only in the normal gaming state in which the stop order notification for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is not executed and when IV = 1 to 2 is won. It is possible to increase the bonus preparation state in which the stop order for establishing a winning is informed. Note that the state in which the stop order for establishing the bell winning prize is notified in the case of winning in any of IV = 1 to 6 is the first AT state of the sub MPU 82.

  In the bonus state process, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the winning combination is received from the main MPU 72. As already described, the drop target combination is IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), and bonus RT mode. IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table (FIG. 20).

  When the lottery result command indicating that the winning combination is won (step S1203: YES), stop order setting processing for avoiding falling is executed (step S1204). In the stop order setting process for fall prevention, data setting for informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning is made regardless of which fall target combination. Accordingly, the stop order for enabling the normal replay winning is established until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that this notification is started. Thus, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning is notified, so that the fall from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2, the fall from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1, and the bonus It is possible to avoid the fall from the RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1. In particular, by avoiding the fall to the normal mode ST1, it is possible to maintain a high replay probability in the bonus state.

  Even if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the fall from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1 is notified in the bonus state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the stop order. If not, the first fall replay winning is established and the lottery mode falls to the normal mode ST1. In this case, although it is a bonus state, the replay probability is relatively low. In addition, when the lottery mode becomes the normal mode ST1, there is a possibility that the first RT mode ST2 may be set. When the lottery mode becomes the first RT mode ST2, there is a possibility that the second RT mode ST3 is set. When the mode is the second RT mode ST3, there is a possibility that the RT mode ST4 is added. In this case, in the bonus state, the stop order for falling avoidance is also notified when the winning combination is won in the lottery mode of either the first RT mode ST2 or the second RT mode ST3. It becomes possible to maintain a state with a high replay probability.

  In the bonus status process, when a lottery result command indicating that the bonus opportunity corresponding role is won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1205: YES), a stop order setting process for bonus transition is executed (step S1206). . In the stop order setting process for bonus transition, data setting for informing the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity is performed. As a result, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the notification of the stop order corresponding to the bonus trigger is started. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled. In this way, by informing the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity, in the bonus state, it is possible to establish either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize when the bonus opportunity correspondence role is won. Note that the processing in step S1206 is executed in the bonus state when the lottery mode falls from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1 in the bonus state and is subsequently won as a bonus opportunity corresponding role.

  In the bonus state process, when a lottery result command indicating that a winning is achieved at any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is received (step S1207: YES), the ART state Generation lottery processing is executed (step S1208). In the generation lottery process of the ART state, an ART generation lottery table corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83 and is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side RAM 84. And the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the ART generation lottery table. In the ART generation lottery table, if IV = 7 is won, the ART generation is won with a probability of 5%. If IV = 8 is won, the ART is generated with a probability of 10%. IV = If 9 is won, it is set to be an ART generation winning with a probability of 15%, and if it is winning with IV = 10, it is set to be an ART generating winning with a probability of 20%.

  If the ART state generation lottery process results in the ART state generation winning selection (step S1209: YES), the remaining ART execution counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is added (step S1210). The remaining ART execution counter is a counter for specifying the remaining execution times in the ART state by the sub-side MPU 82. In step S1210, the value of the remaining ART execution counter is incremented by one. The processing contents after step S1211 in the bonus state processing will be described later.

<Continuation chance period>
Next, the continuation chance period that occurs in the bonus state will be described in detail.

  As already explained, during the continuation chance period, each lottery result of the continuous lottery process executed in the current bonus state or a bonus state before that is executed in a one-to-one correspondence with each lottery result. The player is notified of the effect of the unit effect. The unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, in the continuous chance period, in the state where the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is prevented, the first credit Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts moving in the circumferential direction on condition that the insertion button 47 is operated by the player or the start restriction period elapses, and continues if it is a unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result. The movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped with the combination of symbols in the winning mode displayed in a straight line, and the combination of symbols in the continuous winning mode is displayed in a straight line if it is a unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result. The movement of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped without any failure.

  The operation modes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect will be described in detail with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (d).

  When the continuous chance period is started, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R move in the circumferential direction using an opening period that is surely generated when the continuous chance period starts, as shown in FIG. The movement of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped at a standby position that is a stop pattern of a simple symbol. The rotation speed in this case is the same as the rotation speed at the constant speed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated so that the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed.

  At the standby position, the left reel 32L has the “BAR” symbol at the top, the “cherry” symbol at the middle, the “watermelon” symbol at the bottom, and the “bell” symbol at the top and the “cherry” in the middle reel 32M. The “BAR” symbol stops at the lower stage, and the “BAR” symbol at the upper stage, the “Cherry” symbol at the middle stage, and the “Replay 2” symbol at the lower stage in the right reel 32R. In this case, although the three “cherry” symbols are stopped in a straight line in the sub-line SL3 in the middle stage, the same symbol may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line at the standby position.

  When moving to the standby position, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the same direction. This rotation direction is the same as the rotation direction of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. The drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed by the main MPU 72. The main MPU 72 determines whether or not each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has reached the standby position. , 32R is performed using the number of steps of the stepping motor provided in 32R. Specifically, the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R before the start of the movement is specified from the number of steps of the stepping motor of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R before the movement toward the standby position. Then, the number of steps corresponding to the difference between the specified rotational position and the standby position is calculated for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated by the calculated number of steps. To move to the standby position. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved to the standby position at a constant rotation speed regardless of the number of steps required to move to the standby position. In this case, since the fixed opening period of the continuation chance period is set so as to be equal to or longer than the longest time expected for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to move to the standby position, each reel 32L, The movement of the 32M and 32R to the standby position is surely completed within the opening period.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided with an index sensor, and the detection state of OFF → ON → OFF is switched in the corresponding index sensor every time the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R make one round. A change occurs. When the occurrence of switching of the detection state is specified from the signal reception result, the main-side MPU 72 clears “0” the number of steps grasped for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R where the detection state switching has occurred. .

  The unit effect is started in a state where the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged at the standby positions. When the unit effect is started, as shown in FIG. 33B, the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R start to rotate in the direction in which the symbol moves downward, and the middle reel 32M in the direction in which the symbol moves upward. Start spinning. In this case, the rotational speeds of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the rotational speeds at the constant speed of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at which stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. The rotation speed is lower than that of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The rotation speed is such that the player can clearly identify the symbols visible on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  When the unit effect is started, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated in the above directions in both cases of the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result and the unit effect corresponding to the result of continuous losing. Is started, the “BAR” symbol of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R approaches the middle subline SL3. In the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result, the positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the continuous corresponding positions, and as shown in FIG. 33 (c), three “BAR” symbols are displayed on the middle subline SL3. It will stop in a straight line. Thereby, the stop display mode corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the player is notified of the occurrence of the continuous winning result.

  On the other hand, in the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a timing before the “BAR” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches the middle subline SL3. The direction is opposite to the previous rotation direction. That is, the rotation direction of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R is changed so that the symbol moves upward, and the rotation direction of the middle reel 32M is changed so that the symbol moves downward. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is returned to the standby position. As a result, the stop display mode corresponding to the continuous winning result is not shown on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so that the player is notified of the occurrence of the continuous losing result. In addition, even in the case of a continuation loss result, the vehicle moves from the standby position to a position that becomes a stop display mode corresponding to the continuous winning result, and returns to the standby position without becoming a stop display mode corresponding to the continuous winning result. Since the above operations are performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to execute the unit effect corresponding to the result of the continuation loss using the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  In the configuration in which the operation modes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are different between the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result and the unit effect corresponding to the continuous losing result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in standby in any case. The period required from the start of rotation from the position to the stop at the stop position corresponding to each lottery result is constant. Thereby, it is possible to make the period required for the unit effect constant regardless of the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result and the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result.

  The amount of movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R from the standby position to the continuation corresponding position is one frame until the “BAR” symbol existing in the upper stage or the lower stage moves to the middle stage. In addition, the amount of movement until the rotation direction is reversed and returns to the standby position before reaching the continuation-corresponding position in the continuation loss result is equal to or less than the one frame. As a result, in the unit effect, in the configuration in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a speed at which the type of the moving symbol can be clearly recognized, the time required to execute one unit effect is shortened. It becomes possible to plan.

  In the configuration in which the unit effects are executed using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed in the continuous chance period. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R cannot be rotated. That is, during the continuation chance period, the normal reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are prevented from rotating. In particular, during the continuation chance period, in the situation where the value of the bell establishment counter in the main RAM 74 is “1” in the bonus state, the process for progressing one game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41 and the start lever 41 This is started when a winning combination is made at any of IV = 1 to 6 in the lottery process of the combination executed based on the operation (FIG. 10). Then, in the situation where the operation by the player for starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will execute the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is completed, The start of normal rotation is prevented and the continuation chance period is executed.

  The period in which the rotation start of the normal reels 32L, 32M, 32R is prevented coincides with the continuation period of the continuation chance period, and the continuation period of the continuation chance period varies depending on the number of executions of the unit effect. Here, the number of executions of the unit effect executed during the continuation chance period varies depending on the number of lottery result data of the continuous lottery process that is not the execution target of the unit effect. In addition, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, the continuous chance period ends even if lottery result data of the continuous lottery process that is not the target of the unit effect remains. . That is, the number of executions of the unit effect executed during the continuation chance period varies depending on the timing at which the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. In addition, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated within the range of the start restriction period, the unit effect is started at that time, and the first credit insertion button 47 is not operated within the range of the start restriction period. If the start limit period has elapsed, it will start. That is, the continuation period of the continuation chance period also varies depending on the timing at which the unit production start opportunity executed within the continuation chance period is generated. In addition, when the continuation chance period ends based on the execution of the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result, the continuation chance period ends when the ending period is set and the ending period elapses. When the continuation chance period ends without executing the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result, the continuation chance period ends without setting the ending period. That is, the continuation period of the continuation chance period varies depending on whether or not the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed.

  In a configuration in which the continuous chance period varies depending on the number of executions of the unit effect, the duration of the continuous chance period is not determined at the start of the continuous chance period, but every time the start condition of the unit effect is established, the continuous chance period The duration of is extended. The manner in which the duration of the continuation chance period is extended will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 34 (a) shows a case where the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result is executed twice and the continuation chance period ends, and FIG. 34 (b) is the case where the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result is executed three times. FIG. 34 (c) shows the case where the continuous chance period ends, and FIG. 34 (c) shows that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed once after the unit effect corresponding to the result of continuation losing is executed twice, and the continuous chance period ends. Indicates when to do. In any of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c), each unit effect starts when the start restriction period elapses.

  In any of the cases shown in FIGS. 34A to 34C, the opening period is set when the continuation chance period is started. The opening period is constant regardless of the content of the continuation chance period (for example, 10 sec). In this case, at the start of the continuation chance period, only the opening period is set, and the start restriction period and the unit effect execution continuation period corresponding to the unit effect to be executed thereafter are not set.

  Thereafter, when the opening period elapses, a start restriction period corresponding to the execution time of the first unit effect is set in any of the cases of FIGS. Thereby, the continuation period of a continuation chance period is extended. The start restriction period is always constant (for example, 15 sec).

  Thereafter, when the first start restriction period has elapsed, the first unit effect is started in any of the cases of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). The unit effect continues until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating from the standby position and stops at a position corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process, but the duration is constant (for example, 13 sec). By starting the unit effect, the duration of the continuation chance period is substantially extended.

  After that, when the first unit effect ends, a start restriction period corresponding to the second unit effect execution time is set in any of the cases of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). Thereby, the continuation period of a continuation chance period is extended.

  Thereafter, when the second start restriction period elapses, the second unit effect is started in any of the cases of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). As a result, the duration of the continuation chance period is substantially extended.

  After that, when the unit effect for two times is finished, in the case of FIG. 34A, the continuation chance period is finished at that time. On the other hand, in the case of FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), a start restriction period corresponding to the third execution of the unit effect is set. Thereby, the continuation period of a continuation chance period is extended.

  Thereafter, when the third start restriction period elapses, the third unit effect is started in both cases of FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. 34 (c). As a result, the duration of the continuation chance period is substantially extended.

  Thereafter, when the third unit effect ends, in the case of FIG. 34 (b), the third unit effect is a unit effect corresponding to the result of continuation loss, and thus the continuation chance period ends. On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 34C, since the third unit effect is a unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result, an ending period is set (for example, 13 sec). When the ending period ends, the continuation chance period ends at that time.

  As described above, the continuation period of the continuation chance period is extended every time various events occur. If the duration of the continuous chance period is set at the start of the continuous chance period, it is necessary to determine the execution content of the continuous chance period at the start of the continuous chance period. In this case, the processing load at the start of the continuation chance period becomes extremely high. On the other hand, the duration of the continuation chance period is configured to be extended each time various events occur, so the processing load for setting the continuation period of the continuation chance period is distributed and the continuation chance period starts. It is possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high.

  Further, in the case of a configuration in which the duration of the continuous chance period is set at the start of the continuous chance period, a configuration capable of measuring the longest period assumed as the continuous chance period is required. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the counter is provided in the main RAM 74 and the period is measured, the data capacity necessary to secure the counter is considerably large. On the other hand, since the duration of the continuation chance period is extended every time various events occur, the data capacity necessary to measure the continuation chance period can be reduced.

  Next, how the continuation chance period proceeds will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 35A shows the continuation chance period, FIG. 35B shows the rotation period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a normal game, and FIG. 35C shows the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect. FIG. 35D shows the opening period that occurs when the continuation chance period starts, FIG. 35E shows the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect, and FIG. (F) shows the start restriction period before the unit effect is started, and FIG. 35 (g) shows the execution timing of the start operation of the unit effect.

  In the bonus state, at the timing of t1, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the normal game ends as shown in FIG. Thereafter, a new game start operation is performed at the timing t2, but this time IV = 1 in the situation where the value of the bell establishment counter in the main RAM 74 is “1” (FIG. 10). Since the game is won in any one of -6, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the normal game is not started as shown in FIG. 35B, but as shown in FIG. The continuation chance period begins. In this case, the measurement of the opening period is started at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. Further, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating to move to the standby position.

  Incidentally, at the timing of t2, the stop positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stop positions in the game that ended at the timing of t1. Therefore, at the timing t2, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate from the arbitrary stop position toward the standby position.

  Thereafter, the opening period elapses as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the movement of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the standby position is completed at the timing before the timing of the t3, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Stopped at the standby position. Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), measurement of the start restriction period corresponding to the unit performance of the first execution time is started.

  Thereafter, the first credit insertion button 47 is operated as the start operation of the unit effect as shown in FIG. Thereby, at the timing of t4, the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect are started as shown in FIG.

  Since the current unit effect is a unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is determined in advance before being arranged at the continuation corresponding position. The rotation direction is reversed at the timing of t5 when reaching the midway position, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R returns to the standby position at the timing of t6. At the timing of t6, the first execution of the unit effect ends as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), measurement of the start restriction period corresponding to the next execution unit effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the start restriction period elapses at the timing t7, the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect are started as shown in FIG. 35 (c). Since the unit effect of this time is also a unit effect corresponding to the result of continuation loss, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the rotation direction is reversed by the positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becoming intermediate positions at the timing of t8. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R return to the standby positions at the timing t9. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 35C, the second execution of the unit effect ends. Then, at the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), measurement of the start restriction period corresponding to the next execution unit effect is started.

  Thereafter, the first credit insertion button 47 is operated as the start operation of the unit effect as shown in FIG. As a result, at the timing t10, the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect are started as shown in FIG. 35 (c).

  Since the current unit effect is a unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are continued at intermediate positions without changing the rotation direction to the reverse direction. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R move toward the corresponding position, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reach the continuous corresponding position at the timing of t11, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped. In this case, the measurement of the ending period is started at the timing t11, and the continuation chance period ends as shown in FIG. 35A when the ending period elapses at the timing t12. Then, at the timing of t12, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the normal game start to rotate as shown in FIG. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started from the stop position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the timing t11.

<Process for starting the continuation chance period>
The operation in the above continuation chance period is executed by the control of the main MPU 72. Hereinafter, the processing configuration of the main MPU 72 for performing execution control during the continuation chance period will be described in detail. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the process for starting a continuation chance period, which is executed in step S311 in the lottery process (FIG. 10).

  The value of the bell establishment counter in the main RAM 74 is “1”, and winning is performed at any of IV = 1 to 6 in the lottery process of the current execution (FIG. 10). When the value of 105 is 1 or more (steps S1301 to S1303: YES), the continuation chance period start setting process shown in and after step S1304 is executed.

  For details of the start setting process, first, “1” is set to the continuation chance flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1304). The continuation chance flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is during the continuation chance period. Thereafter, a value corresponding to the opening period (for example, 10 sec) is set in the period measurement counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1305). The value set in the period measurement counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  Thereafter, the number of steps of the stepping motor of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the current stop position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the standby position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. By calculating the difference from the number of steps of the stepping motor, the number of steps up to the standby position is calculated individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1306). The number of steps used in the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the previous game is used as the former number of steps. The latter step number is stored in the main ROM 73 in advance.

  Thereafter, the drive table corresponding to the number of steps calculated in step S1306 is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74 (step S1307). The drive table stores a plurality of types for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is set in one-to-one correspondence with the number of steps that can be calculated in step S1306 for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Yes. In the drive table, drive control pattern data necessary for moving from the corresponding movement source position to the standby position is set. In step S1307, the drive table corresponding to the number of steps calculated in step S1306 is read for each of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R.

  Thereafter, permission setting for rotation drive control is performed (step S1308). Thereby, the execution of the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is permitted, and the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed according to each drive table read in step S1307.

  Thereafter, a continuation chance start command is set (step S1309). The continuation chance start command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp that the continuation chance period has started. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives a continuation chance start command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “2”, the affirmative determination is made in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, setting processing corresponding to the command is executed (step S1212). In the setting process corresponding to the command in this case, data setting is performed so that an effect corresponding to the opening period of the continuation chance period is executed by the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66. The effect corresponding to the opening period starts when the opening period starts and ends when the opening period ends. Then, in the effect corresponding to the opening period, it is notified that the continuation chance period is started, and the game content of the continuation chance period is described.

  When the sub-side MPU 82 receives a continuation chance start command in a situation where the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is not “2”, a forced waiting time for the progress of the game occurs due to the occurrence of a penalty event. The image display device 66 executes notification for enabling the player to recognize that the game is being performed. The notification is continued until either a continuation chance end command or a continuation result response command to be described later is received from the main MPU 72. As a result, even if the unit effect is started on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the situation where the effect corresponding to the bonus state is not executed on the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66, this is a penalty event. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the game is being executed due to the occurrence of

<Continuation chance processing>
When “1” is set in the continuation chance flag in the main RAM 74, the main MPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S207 in the normal process (FIG. 9) and executes the continuation chance process in step S208. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the continuation chance process.

  In the continuation chance process, if the opening period of the continuation chance period has not elapsed (step S1401: NO), it is a condition that the movement of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to the standby position has been completed (step S1402: (YES), prohibition setting of rotation drive control is performed (step S1403). This prohibits the execution of the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  When the opening period of the continuation chance period has elapsed (step S1401: YES), and when the current processing time is the first processing time after the opening period has elapsed (step S1404: YES), the main RAM 74 A start limit period (for example, 15 sec) is set in the provided period measurement counter (step S1405). As already described, the value set in the period measurement counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  In the continuation chance process, after the opening period has elapsed (step S1401: YES), the reel control for unit effect is not performed (step S1406: NO), and the continuation chance period canceling operation is performed. In a situation where it is not known (step S1407: NO), when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated as the start operation of the unit effect (step S1408: YES), or when the start limit period during the current measurement has elapsed ( Step S1409: YES), unit effect start processing shown in step S1410 and subsequent steps is executed.

  In the unit effect start process, first, a storage area specifying process is executed (step S1410). FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the storage area specifying process. In the storage area specifying process, if the value of the fourth determination number counter 104b in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1501: YES), the read target bit (first) in the fourth result storage area 104a in the main RAM 74 is determined. The lottery result data set in the () bit) is read (step S1502). The read target bit is a bit in which the lottery result data stored in the success / failure result fourth storage area 104a is stored in the first order among the lottery result data stored in the success / failure result fourth storage area 104a. It is. The same applies to the first and third storage areas 101a to 103a.

  In the storage area specifying process, when the value of the fourth determination number counter 104b of the main RAM 74 is “0” and the value of the third determination number counter 103b is 1 or more (step S1503: YES), the main RAM 74 The lottery result data set in the read target bit (first bit) in the third storage area 103a is read (step S1504). Further, when both the value of the third determination number counter 103b and the value of the fourth determination number counter 104b in the main RAM 74 are “0” and the value of the second determination number counter 102b is 1 or more (step S1505: YES), the lottery result data set in the read target bit (first bit) in the second result storage area 102a of the main RAM 74 is read (step S1506). Further, when the values of the second determination number counter 102b, the third determination number counter 103b, and the fourth determination number counter 104b in the main RAM 74 are all “0” (step S1505: NO), the main side The lottery result data set in the read target bit (first bit) in the first and second result storage area 101a of the RAM 74 is read (step S1507).

  The lottery result data read in the storage area specifying process becomes the lottery result data for the execution trigger of the current unit presentation, and the lottery result data of the execution trigger for the current unit presentation is either the continuous winning result or the continuous losing result. It is informed whether it corresponds to. In this case, by executing the storage area specifying process as described above, the success / failure result fourth storage area 104a → the success / failure result third storage area 103a → the success / failure result second storage area 102a → the success / failure result in the continuation chance period. As a unit production execution target, priority is given to the first storage area 101a.

  Here, as described above, the result of the continuous lottery process executed when the winning result is IV = 7 is stored as the lottery result data in the first and second result storage area 101a. The result of the continuous lottery process executed when winning is won when IV = 8 is stored as lottery result data, and the winning / notifying result third storage area 103a is executed when winning is won when IV = 9. The result of the continuous lottery process is stored as the lottery result data, and the result of the continuous lottery process executed when the winning result is IV = 10 is stored as the lottery result data in the fourth result determination area 104a. The probability of being a continuous winning result in the continuous lottery process is highest when winning with IV = 10, next with winning when IV = 9, and winning with IV = 8 The next highest, with IV = 7 being the winner. In this case, since the priority selected as the execution target of the unit effect is set as described above, the unit effect is selected as the execution target of the unit effect in order from the lottery result data on the side having a higher probability of the continuous winning result. The Rukoto. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that the unit effect that is the continuous winning result is executed early.

  Returning to the description of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37), when the lottery result data is read in the storage area specifying process (step S1410), it is determined whether or not the read lottery result data corresponds to the continuous winning result. Determination is made (step S1411). When it corresponds to the continuation error result (step S1411: NO), the drive table corresponding to the continuation error result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74 (step S1412). In the drive table corresponding to the continuation detachment result, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R arranged at the standby position starts moving toward the continuation corresponding position and reaches a predetermined intermediate position, the reels The drive control pattern data necessary for the operation of moving in the direction opposite to the rotation direction and returning to the standby position is set. In step S1412, permission setting for rotational drive control is performed. Thereby, the execution of the stepping motor control process of step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is permitted, and the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed according to the drive table corresponding to the continuation error result. Thereafter, “1” is set in the unit effect flag provided in the main RAM 74, and the bonus continuation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S1413). The unit effect flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the unit effect is being executed. Further, the bonus continuation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not a unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result has been executed in the continuation chance period.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result data read in the storage area specifying process corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S1411: YES), the driving table corresponding to the continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74. (Step S1414). In the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R arranged at the standby position starts to move toward the continuous corresponding position, and is necessary for the operation to reach the continuous corresponding position. Control pattern data is set. In step S1414, permission setting for rotation drive control is performed. Thereby, the execution of the stepping motor control process of step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is permitted, and the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed according to the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result. Thereafter, “1” is set to the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74 and “1” is set to the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 (step S1415).

  When the process of step S1413 or step S1415 is executed, a counter subtraction process is executed and a storage area shift process is executed in step S1416. In the counter subtraction process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In the storage area shift process, for the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, a process of overwriting the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit with the mth bit is executed. The shift process is performed for all the bits in order from the bit with the earlier order in which the unit effects are executed.

  Thereafter, a unit production start command is set (step S1417). The unit production start command is a command transmitted to the sub-MPU 82 in order to grasp that the unit production is newly started, and this unit production corresponds to either the continuous winning result or the continuous losing result. Information indicating whether or not When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the unit effect start command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “2”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, the setting process corresponding to the command is executed (step S1212). In the setting process corresponding to the command in this case, data setting for executing an effect corresponding to the unit effect by the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 is performed.

  The effect corresponding to the unit effect starts when the unit effect starts and ends when the unit effect ends. In the production corresponding to the unit production, the production showing the degree of expectation corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. Specifically, when there are multiple types of effects corresponding to the unit effect corresponding to the degree of expectation that it corresponds to the continuous winning result, and when the start command of the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is received The selection rate of the production with high expectation is high, and the selection rate of the production with low expectation is high when the start command of the unit production corresponding to the continuation loss result is received. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the continuous winning result has occurred at the stage before the unit effect ends.

  If “1” is set in the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74, the affirmative determination is made in step S1406 in the continuation chance processing, and the unit effect processing in step S1418 is executed. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the unit production process.

  In the unit effect processing, if the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the drive table in the current unit effect has been completed (step S1601: YES), prohibition setting of the rotational drive control is performed (step S1602). . This prohibits the execution of the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Further, the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the current unit effect is a unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result (step S1604). ). If it is not a unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result (step S1604: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1605). That is, it is determined whether or not there is lottery result data that is not an execution target of the unit effect in any of the storage areas 101 a to 104 a of the main RAM 74.

  When the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1605: NO), it is necessary to newly execute a unit effect during the current continuation chance period. Therefore, similarly to step S1405 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37), a start limit period (for example, 15 sec) is set in the period measurement counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1606). As already described, the value set in the period measurement counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  In step S1607, a command for handling a result of detachment is set. The outlier response command is a command that is transmitted to the sub MPU 82 in order to grasp that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous outage result has ended. If the sub-side MPU 82 receives a disconnection result correspondence command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “2”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, setting processing corresponding to the command is executed (step S1212). In the setting process corresponding to the command in this case, data setting is performed so that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 perform an effect indicating that the current unit effect corresponds to the continuation loss result.

  On the other hand, if the value of the success / failure determination counter in the main RAM 74 is “0” (step S1605: YES), it is determined that the present chance chance period ends without executing the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result. means. In this case, the continuation chance flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S1608). In step S1609, a continuation chance end command is set. The continuation chance end command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp that the continuation chance period has ended without executing the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the continuation chance end command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “2”, the affirmative determination is made in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, setting processing corresponding to the command is executed (step S1212). In the setting process corresponding to the command in this case, the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 execute an effect indicating that the continuous chance period has ended without executing the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result. Set the data for

  In the unit production process, the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the drive table in the current unit production has been completed (step S1601: YES), and the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to “ When “1” is set (step S1604: YES), a continuation result corresponding command is set (step S1610). The continuation result correspondence command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp that the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result has been executed. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the continuation result corresponding command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “2”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, setting processing corresponding to the command is executed (step S1212). In the setting process corresponding to the command in this case, data setting is performed so that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 perform an effect indicating that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result has been executed.

  Thereafter, an ending period (for example, 13 sec) is set in the period measurement counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1611). As already described, the value set in the period measurement counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Then, it waits in step S1612 until an ending period passes. When the ending period has elapsed (step S1612: YES), the continuation chance flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0”.

  Due to the above configuration, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed, the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect remains in any of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74. However, this continuation chance period will end. In this case, the lottery result data that is not the execution target of these unit effects is not erased from the storage areas 101a to 104a, and is inherited to the next execution time of the bonus state. Accordingly, a new execution time of the bonus state may be started in a state where the lottery result data is stored and held in the storage areas 101a to 104a. In this case, the continuous lottery process is executed in the execution time of the bonus state. Even if the lottery is not performed, there is a carry-over portion of the lottery result data, and a continuation chance period will occur. Thereby, it is possible to give many opportunities to execute the unit effects, and it is also possible to increase the probability that the unit effects corresponding to the continuous winning results are executed.

  Here, as already described, the display of the number-of-times notification image G1 in the image display device 66 is terminated when the bonus state is terminated. As a result, even if the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, the unit effect is to be executed after the end of the continuous chance period and before the bonus state ends. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is lottery result data that is not. Further, as already described, the display of the frequency notification image G1 is started when the bonus state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery result data that has not been executed as a unit effect in the bonus state at the previous execution time has been carried over to the bonus state at the current execution time. As a result, it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation for the continuation chance period in the bonus state of new execution times.

<Cancellation processing>
As already explained, during the continuation chance period, the unit effect is basically executed once for one lottery result data of the continuous lottery process, and until the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. The continuation chance period continues until the unit effect is executed for all the unexecuted lottery result data. And in the continuation chance period, since the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will execute the stop control corresponding to the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is prevented, This is the period when digestion is forcibly stopped. In this case, a player who wants to digest a large number of games at an early stage may feel annoying the occurrence of the continuation chance period. On the other hand, the continuation chance period can be ended early based on the player's operation. The cancelable configuration will be described below.

  In the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) of the main MPU 72, if a cancel operation is performed in a situation where the unit effect is not executed in the opening period of the continuation chance period (step S1407: YES), the cancellation process is performed. It executes (step S1419). The operation means for performing the cancel operation is an operation means different from the operation means for performing the start operation of the unit effect, and specifically, is the start lever 41. However, the operation means is not limited to the start lever 41, and may be configured to determine that the cancel operation has been performed when any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When the operation means for performing the start operation is an operation means different from the first credit insertion button 47 such as the start lever 41, it is determined that the cancel operation has been performed when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the canceling process. In the cancel processing, first, a cancel command is set (step S1701). The cancel command is a command that is transmitted to the sub-MPU 82 in order to grasp that the generation of the cancel operation has been effectively accepted during the continuation chance period. When the sub MPU 82 receives the cancel command from the main MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter in the sub RAM 84 is “2”, the sub MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, the setting process corresponding to the command is executed (step S1212). In the setting process corresponding to the command in this case, the cancellation operation of the continuation chance period is performed, the unit presentation at the time of cancellation of the continuation chance period is executed from now on, and the unit presentation corresponds to a plurality of lottery result data The data setting for executing the effect for notifying that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 are in effect is performed.

  Thereafter, the storage area specifying process (FIG. 38) is executed (step S1702) in the same manner as step S1410 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37). Thereby, the lottery result data set in the read target bit in the storage area with the higher priority among the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74 is read. When the lottery result data is read in the storage area specifying process, it is determined whether or not the read lottery result data corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S1703).

  When it corresponds to the continuation failure result (step S1703: NO), similarly to step S1416 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37), the counter subtraction process and the storage area shift process are performed (step S1704). ). Thereby, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In addition, the process of overwriting the mth bit with the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit for the storage areas 101a to 104a that have been read the lottery result data this time is executed. Thereafter, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 in the main RAM 74 is “0”. If the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105 is 1 or more, the process returns to step S1702, and if the value of the determination result counter 105 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1706.

  In step S1706, as in step S1412 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37), the driving table corresponding to the continuation losing result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and rotation drive control permission is set (step S1706). ). As a result, the movement from the standby position toward the continuation corresponding position is started, and when a predetermined intermediate position is reached, the movement is performed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction so far and the operation returns to the standby position. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is driven and controlled as shown. Thereafter, “1” is set to the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74, and the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S1707).

  On the other hand, if it corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S1703: YES), the counter subtraction process and the storage area shift process are executed in the same manner as in step S1416 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) ( Step S1708). Thereby, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In addition, the process of overwriting the mth bit with the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit for the storage areas 101a to 104a that have been read the lottery result data this time is executed.

  Thereafter, similarly to step S1414 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37), the drive table corresponding to the continuation winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and permission setting for rotation drive control is performed (step S1709). As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled so that an operation of starting movement from the standby position toward the continuation corresponding position and reaching the continuation corresponding position is performed. Thereafter, “1” is set to the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74 and “1” is set to the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 (step S1710).

  In addition, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in a situation where the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect remains, the lottery result data that is not the execution target is the next to the bonus state. The point carried over to the execution time is the same when the cancel operation is accepted effectively.

  Hereinafter, the progress of the continuation chance period when a cancel operation is performed in the middle will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 41A shows the execution period of the continuation chance period, FIG. 41B shows the execution period of the opening period, FIG. 41C shows the execution period of the start restriction period, and FIG. FIG. 41 (e) shows the execution timing of the cancel operation, and FIG. 41 (f) shows the notification period that the cancel operation has been accepted effectively.

  At the timing of t1, a continuation chance period is started as shown in FIG. In this case, an opening period is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. The cancel operation is not validated during the opening period. Since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved to the standby position during the opening period as described above, the cancel operation is effective during the opening period, and if the cancel operation is further performed, a chance to continue immediately. If the period is ended or the unit effect is started, it is necessary to stop the movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R or start a new movement during the movement to the standby position. Then, there is a possibility that drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R cannot be performed satisfactorily. On the other hand, such a problem can be prevented by adopting a configuration in which the cancel operation is not validated during the opening period.

  Thereafter, when the opening period ends as shown in FIG. 41B at the timing of t2, the first start restriction period starts as shown in FIG. 41C. In this start restriction period, the unit production start operation is not performed, and the continuation chance period cancel operation is not performed. In this case, the unit effect starts at the timing t3 when the start restriction period elapses. Since the unit effect corresponds to one lottery result data, and the lottery result data corresponds to the continuation failure result, the operation contents of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the continuation failure result in the unit effect. The operation contents to be.

  Incidentally, the cancel operation is not validated during the execution period of the unit effect. If the cancel operation is valid during the execution period of the unit effect, and if the cancel operation is performed, the continuation chance period is immediately ended or the unit effect is newly started, the content of the unit effect is During the movement of the corresponding operation mode, it is necessary to stop the movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R or start a new movement. Then, there is a possibility that drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R cannot be performed satisfactorily. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience by adopting a configuration in which the cancel operation is not validated during the unit effect execution period.

  Thereafter, when the unit effect ends at the timing of t4, a start restriction period is newly started as shown in FIG. In this case, a cancel operation is performed as shown in FIG. 41E at a timing t5 which is a timing before the timing when the start restriction period elapses. Since the cancel operation is performed during the start restriction period, it is accepted as valid. Therefore, at the time t5, a notification for causing the player to recognize that the cancel operation has been accepted effectively is started as shown in FIG. 41 (f). Further, at the timing of t5, a unit effect is started as shown in FIG. In this case, when all the lottery result data not subject to execution of the unit effect correspond to the continuation losing result, the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the continuation losing result, that is, the continuation correspondence from the standby position. The movement is started toward the position, and the operation of returning to the standby position is performed once at the midway position before reaching the continuation corresponding position and the rotation direction is reversed. On the other hand, when at least one lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included in the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect, the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the continuous winning result That is, the movement of starting from the standby position toward the continuation corresponding position and stopping at the continuation corresponding position is performed once.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the unit effect ends as shown in FIG. 41 (d), and the notification period that the cancel operation has been effectively accepted ends as shown in FIG. 41 (f). The continuation chance period ends at the timing of t7.

<End branch processing>
Next, the end branch process executed in step S1112 in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The end branch process is executed when one execution time in the bonus state ends.

  In the end branch process, when “1” is not set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1801: NO), the bonus RT flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S1802). Also, “1” is set to the bonus output end flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1803). The bonus output end flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that an external output state corresponding to the end of the bonus RT mode ST5 should be set. Thereafter, a bonus end command is set (step S1804). The bonus end command is a command transmitted to the sub MPU 82 in order to grasp that the bonus state has ended.

  When the sub MPU 82 receives the bonus end command from the main MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter in the sub RAM 84 is “2”, the sub MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1215 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). . In step S1216, it is determined whether one of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 and the ART game number counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The remaining ART execution counter is a counter for specifying the remaining execution times in the ART state by the sub-side MPU 82 as described above, and the ART game number counter is a sub-count for the remaining number of continuing games in one execution time in the ART state. This is a counter for specifying by the side MPU 82. If the values of both the remaining ART execution counter and the ART game number counter are “0” (step S1216: NO), this means that the ART state transferable condition is not satisfied. In this case, the value of the AT state counter in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to “0” (step S1217). As a result, the sub MPU 82 executes non-AT processing (step S704) from the next periodic process (FIG. 23), and the control state of the sub MPU 82 returns from the first AT state to the non-AT state. Further, a setting process corresponding to normal return is executed (step S1218). In the setting process corresponding to the normal return, data setting is performed so that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 perform an effect indicating that the bonus state ends and the normal game state is restored.

  On the other hand, if the value of either the remaining ART execution counter or the ART game number counter is 1 or more (step S1216: YES), it means that the ART state transition enabling condition is satisfied. In this case, “3” is set in the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1219). Thereby, the sub MPU 82 executes the ART preparation state process (step S908) from the next AT process (FIG. 25), and the control state of the sub MPU 82 shifts from the first AT state to the second AT state. Further, a setting process corresponding to ART migration is executed (step S1220). In the setting process corresponding to the ART transition, data setting is performed so that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 perform an effect indicating that the bonus state is ended and the state is shifted to the ART state.

  Returning to the description of the end branch process (FIG. 40), in the end branch process, when “1” is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1801: YES), the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74 ends. “20” corresponding to the reference number is set (step S1805). As a result, the end reference game number for the new execution times in the bonus state is set. Further, “1” is set to the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1806). As described above, the bonus output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that an external output state corresponding to the start of the bonus RT mode ST5 should be set. Thereafter, a bonus continuation command is set (step S1807). The bonus continuation command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp that the next execution time of the bonus state is executed as it is when one execution time of the bonus state is completed.

  When the sub MPU 82 receives the bonus continuation command from the main MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter in the sub RAM 84 is “2”, the sub MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1213 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). In step S1214, the continuous correspondence setting process is executed. In the setting process corresponding to the continuation, data setting is performed so that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 perform an effect indicating that a new execution time of the bonus state is started.

  As described above, when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 when the conditions for enabling the transition to the bonus state are satisfied, the control state of the sub MPU 82 becomes the first AT state, and the gaming state is the bonus. It becomes a state. In the bonus state, a bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) is executed in the main MPU 72 and a bonus state process (FIG. 32) is executed in the sub MPU 82. As a result, a state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the expected number of medals per unit game is increased continues for a plurality of games, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the bonus state, the continuous lottery process is executed when winning is achieved at any of IV = 7 to 10, and when the result of the continuous lottery process becomes the continuous winning result, a new execution time of the bonus state is executed. The condition for starting is established. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that a continuous winning result will be generated in the bonus state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The continuous lottery process is executed when the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72 results in winning at any of IV = 7 to 10, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R Since it is possible to grasp whether or not IV = 7 to 10 has been won from the stop mode, it is possible to increase the expectation for the generation of the continuous winning result in relation to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It becomes possible. In addition, the probability of a continuous winning result is different for each of IV = 7-10. Also from this point, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the generation of the continuous winning result in relation to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  At the timing when the continuous lottery process is executed, the player is not notified of the lottery result, and the result of the continuous lottery process is collectively notified during the continuous chance period that occurs in the final game in the bonus state. As a result, the period during which the result of the continuous lottery process is notified can be aggregated into the continuation chance period, and a period in which the degree of attention of the player who expects the continuous winning result to be generated can be generated.

  In addition, according to the configuration, it is possible to let the player expect that the continuous lottery process is executed until the continuous chance period starts and that the result of the continuous lottery process becomes the continuous winning result. In the chance period, it is possible to expect the notification that the continuous winning result is obtained, so that it is possible to change the target that the player pays attention in the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  In the continuous chance period, a unit effect for informing the result of the continuous lottery process is executed. The unit effect is executed in a one-to-one correspondence with a single result of the continuous lottery process. That is, one unit effect is not executed for the results of all the continuous lottery processes that occurred until the continuous chance period occurs, but each result of the continuous lottery process is individually notified as a unit effect. The Further, the unit effect is not executed only when the result of the continuous lottery process is the result of continuous winning, but the unit effect is executed even when the result of the continuous lottery process is the result of continuous losing. Thereby, it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of the unit effect, and it is possible to give many opportunities to increase the degree of attention to the game using the unit effect.

  In the configuration in which the results of the continuous lottery process are reported together in the continuous chance period, the number of lottery result data of the continuous lottery process that is not the target of the unit effect is the period before the continuous chance period in the bonus state and the continuation It is displayed on the image display device 66 as the frequency notification image G1 in both chance periods. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the number of executions of unit effects that will be executed in the future, and it is possible to suitably increase the player's sense of expectation.

  In the configuration in which the probability of the continuous winning result in the continuous lottery process is different for each of IV = 7 to 10, the number of lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect in the count notification image G1 is IV = 7 to Each of 10 is displayed separately. As a result, the player will play the game with the expectation that the lottery result data having a high probability of being a continuous winning result will be acquired, and the number of lottery result data having a high probability of being a continuous winning result is one or more. In this case, it is expected that the unit effect for the lottery result data is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the configuration in which the probability of the continuous winning result in the continuous lottery process is different for each of IV = 7 to 10, in the continuous chance period, the unit effect is given priority from the lottery result data having a high probability of the continuous winning result. It becomes an execution target. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result can be easily executed early in the continuous chance period, and the continuous chance period in which the unit directing corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed is long. It is possible to reduce the probability of the period.

  During the continuation chance period, lottery result data of the continuous lottery process executed with the same winning combination among IV = 7 to 10 as a trigger is a unit performance execution target according to the order in which the lottery result data is acquired. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is compared to the configuration that is executed with priority over the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result and the configuration that is executed with priority over the unit effect corresponding to the continuous losing result. The execution timing can be made irregular, and the player can be expected for each unit effect.

  In the configuration in which the results of the continuous lottery process are collectively notified during the continuous chance period that occurs in the final game in the bonus state, the continuous lottery process is executed in the game that is won in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus state. . This makes it possible to distribute the processing load compared to a configuration in which continuous lottery processing is executed collectively in the continuous chance period, and the situation where the processing load increases locally and the processing waiting time in the continuous chance period is prolonged. It is possible to prevent the situation to occur.

  When the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed, even if lottery result data that is not the target of the unit effect remains in any of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74, the current continuous chance period Will end. In this case, the lottery result data that is not the execution target of these unit effects is not erased from the storage areas 101a to 104a, and is inherited to the next execution time of the bonus state. Accordingly, a new execution time of the bonus state may be started in a state where the lottery result data is stored and held in the storage areas 101a to 104a. In this case, the continuous lottery process is executed in the execution time of the bonus state. Even if the lottery is not performed, there is a carry-over portion of the lottery result data, and a continuation chance period will occur. Thereby, it is possible to give many opportunities to execute the unit effects, and it is also possible to increase the probability that the unit effects corresponding to the continuous winning results are executed.

  The display of the number-of-times notification image G1 in the image display device 66 is terminated when the bonus state is terminated. As a result, even if the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, the unit effect is to be executed after the end of the continuous chance period and before the bonus state ends. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is lottery result data that is not. Further, as already described, the display of the frequency notification image G1 is started when the bonus state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery result data that has not been executed as a unit effect in the bonus state at the previous execution time has been carried over to the bonus state at the current execution time. As a result, it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation for the continuation chance period in the bonus state of new execution times.

  The unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This makes it possible to execute a unit effect using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for clearly indicating the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in each game.

  When the unit effect ends, the result of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the current unit effect is notified by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R after the variable display. Thereby, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the end timing of one execution time of the unit effect and the result of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the unit effect of each execution time are clearly shown to the player. Can be recognized.

  The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect is started based on the player's start operation, and is also started when the start limit period elapses without the start operation being executed. By starting the unit effect when the start operation is executed by the player, the unit effect can be started by the player's positive operation. Moreover, it becomes possible to prevent the continuation chance period from becoming excessively long by forcibly starting the unit effect when the start restriction period has elapsed.

  The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect stops regardless of the player's operation. As a result, the processing configuration for executing the unit effect is simplified, and the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the end of the unit effect is used as the stop result corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process. Easy control is achieved.

  In the unit effect, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R operate in a manner different from the operation manner of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which drive control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect is represented by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process. It is possible to make the player recognize it clearly distinctly from the movement of.

  In the unit effect, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R move in the rotation direction at a speed slower than the rotation speed of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the drive control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. To do. Thereby, the player who is accustomed to the rotation speed corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) clearly recognizes the difference when the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit effect is confirmed. It becomes.

  In the continuous chance period, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged at the standby position, and in the unit effect, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R move from the standby position toward the continuous corresponding position, and correspond to the result of continuous detachment. In the case of a unit effect, the rotation direction is reversed in the middle position before reaching the continuation corresponding position and returns to the standby position, whereas in the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result, the continuation corresponding position is reached. As a result, the unit effects corresponding to the continuation loss result and the continuous winnings are made while changing the final operation modes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R between the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result and the unit effects corresponding to the continuation winning result. Any unit effect corresponding to the result can be made to share the start mode of the unit effect, and the player can be expected to generate a continuous winning result at each execution time of the unit effect.

  The amount of movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R from the standby position to the continuation corresponding position is one frame until the “BAR” symbol existing in the upper stage or the lower stage moves to the middle stage. In addition, the amount of movement until the rotation direction is reversed and returns to the standby position before reaching the continuation-corresponding position in the continuation loss result is equal to or less than the one frame. As a result, in the unit effect, in the configuration in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a speed at which the type of the moving symbol can be clearly recognized, the time required to execute one unit effect is shortened. It becomes possible to plan.

  When the continuation chance period is started, an opening period for notifying the player that the continuation chance period is started is started. In this case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R moves to the standby position before the opening period ends. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be moved to the standby positions using the opening period.

  The opening period is set as a fixed period, and the longest period assumed as a period necessary for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to move to the standby position is equal to or shorter than the opening period. Thus, in the configuration in which the opening period is set to a certain period to simplify the processing configuration regarding the setting of the opening timing of the opening period and the identification of the end timing, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are within the range of the opening period. It is possible to adjust the stop position to the standby position.

  In the continuation chance period, after the game start condition is satisfied and the lottery process for the winning combination in the game (FIG. 10) is executed, the reels 32L and 32M are subjected to stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process. , 32R occurs in a period in which the start of rotation is blocked. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the unit effect executed during the continuation chance period. In this case, the duration of each unit presentation is adjusted according to the number of executions of the unit presentation within the range in which the duration of the continuation chance period is fixed, or the number of executions of the unit presentation is not adjusted. The continuation period of the continuation chance period varies depending on the number of executions. Thereby, the freedom degree of design regarding the content of the unit effect of each execution time and the frequency | count of the unit effect performed in a continuation chance period is raised.

  When it is decided to start a new unit effect, the duration of the continuation chance period will be extended, so at the start of the continuation chance period, the entire duration of the continuation chance period will be calculated, There is no need to specify the end timing of the chance period in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start timing of the continuation chance period.

  In the continuation chance period, after the game start condition is satisfied and the lottery process for the winning combination in the game (FIG. 10) is executed, the reels 32L and 32M are subjected to stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process. , 32R occurs in a period in which the start of rotation is blocked. In this case, after the continuation chance period ends, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which stop control corresponding to the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is started. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the continuation chance period has ended. Further, the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is compared with the configuration in which the continuous chance period is started during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the above.

  The continuation chance period occurs in a game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. Further, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect becomes the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result, and then a new bonus state is added. Execution times are started. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed as the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R immediately before the new execution time of the bonus state is started, so the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed. It becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the display corresponds to the start of a new execution time in the bonus state.

  During the continuous chance period, the unit effect is basically executed once for one lottery result data of the continuous lottery process, and during the continuous chance period, the stop control corresponding to the lottery process (FIG. 10) In the configuration in which the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is prevented, the number of unit effects executed during the continuation chance period is reduced when the cancel operation is executed by the player. Will be. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of unit effects executed during the continuation chance period from being increased more than necessary. In addition, even if the number of unit effects executed in the continuous chance period decreases, the number of executions of the continuous lottery process and the result of the continuous lottery process are not affected, so the player's profit is not lost. It is possible to prevent the number of unit effects executed in the chance period from becoming more than necessary.

  When the number of unit effects executed in the continuous chance period based on the cancel operation decreases, the duration of the continuous chance period is shortened accordingly. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the continuation period of the continuation chance period from being fixed as it is despite the decrease in the number of executions of the unit effect.

  Based on the cancel operation performed by the player, the number of unit effects executed in the continuation chance period is reduced. As a result, a player who wants to digest a large number of games early can shorten the duration of the continuation chance period, and the continuation chance period is forced to continue, and the player feels troublesome to that. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

  In the case where no lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included when the canceling operation is performed, the unit corresponding to the continuous losing result as a unit effect corresponding to all of the remaining lottery result data In the situation where the production is executed once, the continuation chance period ends, and lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included, it corresponds to each lottery result data up to the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result. The unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed once as the unit effect, and the continuation chance period ends. Thereby, even if a cancel operation is performed, it is possible to notify the player by executing the unit effect whether or not a new execution time of the bonus state occurs. On the other hand, when the cancel operation is performed, the unit effect is executed only once thereafter and the continuation chance period is ended, so that the continuation chance period can be ended early.

  The cancel operation is not validated during the opening period of the continuation chance period. Since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved to the standby position in the opening period, the cancel operation is effective in the opening period, and the continuation chance period is immediately ended when the cancel operation is further performed. If the configuration or the configuration in which the unit effect is started, it is necessary to stop the movement of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R or start a new movement during the movement to the standby position. Then, there is a possibility that drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R cannot be performed satisfactorily. On the other hand, such a problem can be prevented by adopting a configuration in which the cancel operation is not validated during the opening period.

  The cancel operation is validated in the start restriction period before the unit effect is started, and is not validated in the execution period of the unit effect. If the cancel operation is valid during the execution period of the unit effect, and if the cancel operation is performed, the continuation chance period is immediately ended or the unit effect is newly started, the content of the unit effect is During the movement of the corresponding operation mode, it is necessary to stop the movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R or start a new movement. Then, there is a possibility that drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R cannot be performed satisfactorily. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience by adopting a configuration in which the cancel operation is not validated during the unit effect execution period.

  Here, when the player stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order corresponding to the penalty event even though the sub-side MPU 82 is in the non-AT state, the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is not satisfied. Under certain circumstances, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 may shift to the bonus RT mode ST5. In this case, when the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 occurs in the main MPU 72, step S1102 and subsequent steps in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) regardless of whether or not the condition for allowing transition to the bonus state is satisfied. Since the above process is executed, control for the bonus state is executed. On the other hand, the sub MPU 82 does not execute the bonus state process (FIG. 32) even if the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 occurs in a situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is not satisfied. Accordingly, even if the control for the bonus state is executed in the main MPU 72, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the bell winning when the winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 6 is Not notified. In addition, even if winning is made at any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20), the stop order for avoiding the first fall replay winning is not notified, so the bonus RT mode ST5 The lottery mode transition to the normal mode ST1 occurs early. Therefore, even if the bonus state control is executed in the main MPU 72 in a situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is not satisfied, it is possible to prevent the bonus state profit from being given to the player. Become.

  In addition, the main MPU 72 does not always execute the continuous lottery process when winning in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the situation where the processing after step S1104 in the bonus RT management process is executed, The continuous lottery process is executed only when winning is achieved in any of IV = 7 to 10 in a situation where the mode is the bonus RT mode ST5. As described above, in the situation where the bonus state process (FIG. 32) is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, the stop order for avoiding the first falling replay winning is not notified, so the control for the bonus state is executed in the main side MPU 72. Even so, it is considered that the lottery mode transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1 occurs early. Therefore, the possibility that a continuation chance period will occur when control for the bonus state is executed in the main MPU 72 in a situation that is not in the bonus state is reduced.

<ART preparation status processing>
Next, the ART preparation state process executed in step S908 of the in-AT process (FIG. 25) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described.

  The ART ready state is a state in which the user stays before shifting to the ART state when the condition for enabling the transition to the ART state is satisfied. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for enabling the establishment of a bell winning when the winning condition is set at any one of IV = 1 to 2 in the ART ready state, provided that it is not a penalty state during preparation. Is notified, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning is not notified even if the winning is made at any of IV = 3 to 6. Also, in the ART ready state, when winning is made in any of IV = 15 to 18 (hereinafter also referred to as a promotion target role) in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) or the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize (hereinafter also referred to as a stop order for promotion occurrence) is notified. This state is the already described second AT state of the sub-side MPU 82, as in the bonus preparation state. The transition to the ART state is performed in the situation where the ART preparation state process or the ART end branch process is executed in the sub-side MPU 82, and the reel 32L is selected in the first RT mode ST2 as a promotion target role and in a stop order for promotion occurrence. , 32M, 32R are stopped, and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the ART preparation state process. In the ART preparation state process, it is determined whether a penalty event in the ART preparation state has occurred (step S1901). The penalty event during the ART preparation state includes any of IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), or the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). It is included that one of the first special replay win and the second special replay win is established. In the ART preparation state, even if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the combination in the main MPU 72 is the above lottery result, the stop order for shifting the lottery mode is not notified. The winning results for shifting to the lottery mode do not occur unless the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. That is, each of the above events is an event that occurs when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop even though the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified. The event is set as a penalty event in the ART ready state.

  Further, the penalty event in the ART ready state includes the fact that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stop order for promotion when the winning combination is won. In the ART preparation state, when the role to be promoted is elected, the stop order for the promotion occurrence is notified by the image display device 66, but the promotion occurrence occurrence is performed despite the notification being executed. An event in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stop order is a penalty event in the ART ready state.

  If a penalty event in the ART ready state has occurred (step S1901: YES), “1” is set in the preparing penalty flag of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1902). As already described, the preparation penalty flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that a penalty event has occurred during the bonus preparation state or the ART preparation state. The preparation penalty flag is cleared to “0” when the ART preparation state is shifted to the ART state.

  In the ART ready state process, when the lottery result command indicating that the winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 2 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1903: YES), the subordinate RAM 84 preparing penalty flag On the condition that “1” is not set to “No” (step S1904: NO), a stop order setting process for winning a bell is executed (step S1905). In the stop order setting process for bell winning, data setting for notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is performed. As a result, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning a prize until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. In this way, by informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning at the time of winning of IV = 1 to 2 in the bonus preparation state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected number of medals per unit game in the bonus preparation state as compared to the normal gaming state in which the stop order notification for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is not executed.

  In the ART preparation state process, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the specific target combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72. The specific target combination includes IV = 11-14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11-14, 19-24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table ( IV = 11-21 in FIG. 18) and IV = 11-16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20).

  When the lottery result command indicating that the specific target combination is won is received (step S1906: YES), the stop order setting process for the specific target combination is executed (step S1907). In the stop order setting process for the specific target combination, IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14, 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and In the 2RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), if any of IV = 11 to 15 is won, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning. In these cases, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the stop for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the order notification is started. Thus, by notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning, it is possible to avoid the transition to the additional RT mode ST4 or the bonus RT mode ST5, and from the first RT mode ST2. It is possible to avoid the transition to the normal mode ST1.

  In the stop order setting process for the specific target combination, in order to make it possible to establish the second falling replay winning if the winning condition is any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). The data setting for informing the stop order is performed. In this case, the second fall replay winning can be established before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that notification of the stop order is started. In the situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode ST3, it is assumed that the state shifts to the ART ready state, whereas the transition to the ART state is when the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 in the ART ready state. Occurs. Then, when the state shifts to the ART ready state in the second RT mode ST3, it is necessary to temporarily shift the lottery mode to the first RT mode ST2 in order to generate an opportunity to shift to the ART state. Therefore, the stop order for enabling the second falling replay winning is notified in the situation where any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is won. Therefore, it is possible to positively cause the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2.

  In the stop order setting process for the specific target combination, in order to make it possible to establish the first fall replay winning if the winning condition is any one of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20). The data setting for informing the stop order is performed. In this case, the first troll replay winning can be established before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that notification of the stop order is started. In the situation where the lottery mode is the bonus RT mode ST5, it is assumed that the state shifts to the ART ready state, whereas the transition to the ART state is when the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 in the ART ready state. Occurs. Then, when the transition to the ART ready state is made in the bonus RT mode ST5, it is necessary to temporarily shift the lottery mode to the normal mode ST1 in order to generate a trigger for the transition to the ART state. Therefore, the stop order for enabling establishment of the first falling replay winning in the situation where any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won is notified. Thus, it is possible to actively cause the transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1.

  In the ART preparation state process, when a lottery result command indicating that the role to be promoted is won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1908: YES), a stop order setting process for promotion is executed (step S1908). S1909). In the stop order setting process for the promotion occurrence, data setting for informing the stop order for the promotion occurrence is performed. As a result, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the current game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the notification of the stop order for the promotion occurrence is started. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled. By informing the stop order for the occurrence of promotion in this way, in the ART ready state, it is possible to establish the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning at the time of winning the promotion target role.

  In the ART ready state process, when a winning result command indicating that the winning is achieved in any of IV = 7 to 10 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1910: YES), the subordinate RAM 84 preparing penalty flag On the condition that “1” is not set to “No” (step S1911: NO), the lottery process for adding the number of initial continued games is executed (step S1912). In the initial lottery game additional lottery process, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continued games in the ART state when the ART preparation state is shifted to the ART state, and if it is added, the number of additional games is determined. To do. In the initial lottery game additional lottery process, the initial lottery game additional lottery table corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83 and updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84. The value of the sub-side lottery counter is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is added to the initial continuous game number and collated with the lottery table. In the initial lottery game additional lottery table, there is a high probability that an additional game will occur in the order of IV = 7 → IV = 8 → IV = 9 → IV = 10, and the number of games expected to be acquired in the additional game is large. It is set to be. When the number of initial continued games is added and won in the lottery process (step S1913: YES), the number of added games selected in the added lottery process is added to the initial additional counter provided in the sub RAM 84 ( Step S1914). The initial extra counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the extra number of continuing games in the ART state when the ART state is entered.

  In the ART preparation state process, when a winning result command indicating that the game is won in IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1915: YES), on condition that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order for promotion generation (step S1916: YES), “4” is set to the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1917). . As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes an ART state process (step S909) described later in the next AT process (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state. Thereafter, on condition that the value of the ART game number counter in the sub RAM 84 is “0” (step S1918: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S1919).

<ART status processing>
Next, the ART state process executed in step S909 of the in-AT process (FIG. 25) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the ART state processing, it is determined whether or not the current processing time is the processing time immediately after the transition from the ART ready state or the ART end branch state to the ART state. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2001). If it is the start timing of the ART state (step S2001: YES), a setting process to the ART game number counter is executed (step S2002).

  In the setting process to the ART game number counter, if the value of the ART game number counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, the value of the initial addition counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is added to the value of the ART game number counter. As a result, when the bonus state is entered in the middle of the ART state and the ART state is resumed after the bonus state is finished, the remaining number of continued games in the execution state of the ART state that was being executed The additional number of continuing games generated in the ART preparation state is added. On the other hand, in the setting process to the ART game number counter, if the value of the ART game number counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “0”, after setting the initial continued game number “50” in the ART game number counter, The value of the initial extra counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is added to the value of the ART game number counter. As a result, when one execution time of the ART state is newly started, the additional number of continuous games generated in the ART preparation state is added to the initial number of continuous games in the one execution time of the ART state.

  In the ART state process, when a lottery result command indicating that the winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 6 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2003: YES), the stop order setting process for the bell winning is performed. Execute (Step S2004). In the stop order setting process for bell winning, data setting for notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is performed. As a result, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning a prize until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. In this way, by informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning at the time of winning of IV = 1 to 6 in the ART state. Therefore, the expected number of medals per unit game in the ART state is set to the bell only in the normal gaming state in which the stop order notification for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning is not executed and when IV = 1-2 is won. It becomes possible to raise it higher than the ART ready state in which the stop order for establishing a prize is notified. Note that the state in which the stop order for establishing the bell winning is informed in the case of winning in any of IV = 1 to 6 in this way is the first AT of the sub MPU 82 as in the bonus state. State.

  In the ART state process, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the special target combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72. Special target combinations are IV = 11-14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11-14, 19-24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), the second RT mode lottery table ( IV = 11 to 14, 16 to 21 in FIG. 18), and IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20).

  When the lottery result command indicating that the special target combination is won is received (step S2005: YES), the stop order setting process for the special target combination is executed (step S2006). In the stop order setting process for the special target combination, IV = 11-14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11-14, 19-24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and In the 2RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), if the winning condition is any one of IV = 11 to 14 and 16 to 21, data setting for informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning a prize. I do. In these cases, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the stop for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the order notification is started. Thus, by notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning, it is possible to avoid the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5, and from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2. And the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 can be avoided.

  In the stop order setting process for the special target combination, in order to make it possible to establish the first falling replay winning if the winning condition is any one of IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode (FIG. 20). The data setting for informing the stop order is performed. In this case, the first troll replay winning can be established before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that notification of the stop order is started. In the ART state, the stop order for avoiding the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 will be notified. It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. On the other hand, by actively informing the stop order for establishing the first fall replay winning in the situation where any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won, It is possible to actively cause the transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1.

  In the ART state process, when a lottery result command indicating that the role to be promoted is won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2007: YES), a stop order setting process for the promotion is executed (step S2008). In the stop order setting process for the promotion occurrence, data setting for informing the stop order for the promotion occurrence is performed. As a result, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the current game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the notification of the stop order for the promotion occurrence is started. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled. By informing the stop order for promotion in this way, in the ART state, it is possible to establish the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning at the time of winning the role to be promoted. Note that the processing in step S2008 is executed in the ART state when the lottery mode falls to the first RT mode ST2 or the normal mode ST1 in the ART state and is subsequently elected as a promotion target role.

  In the ART state process, when the lottery result command indicating that the winning is achieved in any of IV = 7 to 10 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2009: YES), the lottery process is executed by adding the number of continuous games. (Step S2010). In the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games, the additional lottery table for the number of continuous games corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub-RAM 84 is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). The value of the side lottery counter is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is added to the number of continuous games and checked against the lottery table. In the additional lottery table for the number of continuing games, the probability of an additional occurrence increases in the order of IV = 7 → IV = 8 → IV = 9 → IV = 10, and the number of games expected to be acquired in that order increases. Is set to If the number of continued games is added and won in the lottery process (step S2011: YES), the number of added games selected in the added lottery process is added to the ART game number counter in the sub RAM 84 (step S2012). .

  In the ART state process, when the lottery result command indicating that the winning is achieved by IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2013: YES), the additional transition is performed. The stop order setting process is executed (step S2014). In the stop order setting process for addition transition, data setting is performed to notify the stop order for enabling either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning. Thereby, before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is won. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so as to start notification of the stop order to enable the establishment of the above. By informing the stop order in this way, it becomes possible to establish either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning.

  In the ART state process, when a winning result command indicating that the game is won in any of IV = 7 to 10 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2015 and step S2016: YES), a bonus generation lottery is performed. Processing is executed (step S2017). In the bonus generation lottery process, the bonus generation lottery table corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side RAM 84. And the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the bonus generation lottery table. In the bonus generation lottery table, if IV = 7 is won, the bonus is generated with a probability of 5%. If IV = 8 is selected, the bonus is generated with a probability of 10%. IV = In the case of winning at 9, the bonus is generated with a probability of 15%, and when winning with IV = 10, the bonus is generated with a probability of 20%. When the bonus generation lottery process is won (step S2018: YES), “1” is set in the AT state counter of the sub RAM 84 (step S2019). Thereby, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the bonus preparation state process (step S906) already described in the next AT process (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART state to the bonus preparation state. In this case, the value of the ART game number counter and the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 are held without being cleared to “0”.

  In the ART state processing, when a winning result command indicating that the game is won by IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is received from the main MPU 72 (steps S2015 and S2020: YES), on condition that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order that enables either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning (step S2021: YES), “6” is set in the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S2022). Thus, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the added state process (step S911) in the next AT process (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART state to the added state. In this case, the value of the ART game number counter and the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 are held without being cleared to “0”.

  In the additional RT mode lottery table, as described above, only IV = 1 to 10 are set as winning combinations. In IV = 1 to 10, the same winning data as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set. In this case, the winning probabilities for IV = 1 to 7 are the same as in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). On the other hand, each winning probability of IV = 8-10 is set higher than the winning probability of the corresponding IV value in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). Specifically, in the added RT mode ST4, only the roles that can be replayed are IV = 8 to 10, and the probability of winning in any of IV = 8 to 10 is set to about 1 / 2.5. ing. As a result, in the extra RT mode ST4, the probability that the bell replay winning, the first cherry replay winning, and the second cherry replay winning are achieved is increased.

  In the added state process (step S911) during the AT process (FIG. 25), if the winning is achieved in any of IV = 7 to 10, the number of continued games in the ART state is surely generated. In this case, the number of extra games is determined by lottery. In the lottery, each of IV = 7 to 10 has a different number of expected games to be acquired. Then, the number of games determined by the lottery is added to the ART game number counter in the sub-side RAM 84. In the added state processing, “20” is set as the number of continued games in the added state at the start thereof, and 1 is subtracted from the set number of continued games every time a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72. Then, when the value of the number of continuing games becomes “0”, “4” is set in the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84. Thereby, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the ART state process (step S909) in the next AT process (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the added state to the ART state.

  In the ART state process (FIG. 44), a winning result command indicating that the game is not won by IV = 7 to 10 and 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is received from the main MPU 72. If this is the case (step S2020: NO), a bonus result command is received from the main MPU 72 indicating that the game is won by IV = 7-10 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), and the bonus When the bonus lottery process is not performed (step S2018: NO), or a winning result command indicating that the game is won by IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of stopping for the addition transition when receiving from the side MPU 72 If you did not (step S2021: NO), the process proceeds to step S2023. In step S2023, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ART game number counter in the sub-side RAM 84. If the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2024: YES), “5” is set to the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S2025). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the ART end branch process (step S910) in the next AT process (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART state to the ART end branch state.

<ART end branch processing>
The ART end branch state is a game state in which the player stays when one execution time of the ART state ends. Stopping reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to enable the establishment of a bell win when winning at any of IV = 1 to 6 in the ART end branch state, provided that it is not a penalty state during branch The order is announced. Further, in the ART end branch state, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more, it finally returns to the ART state, and if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, it is finally returned. The sub-side MPU 82 shifts to a normal gaming state in which it is in a non-AT state. Here, since the transition to the ART end branch state is made when one execution time in the ART state is completed, there is a high possibility that the lottery mode is the second RT mode ST3 at the timing of transition to the ART end branch state. In this case, even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 is once generated, and then the transition to the second RT mode ST3 is performed again. A new execution of the ART state is started.

  The manner in which the ART end branch state is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 45 (a) shows the execution period of the ART state, FIG. 45 (b) shows the execution period of the ART end branch state, FIG. 45 (c) shows the execution period of the second RT mode ST3, and FIG. ) Shows the execution period of the first RT mode ST2, FIG. 45 (e) shows the execution period of the normal mode ST1, and FIG. 45 (f) shows the period in which the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. FIG. 45 (g) shows a game that has been elected to the promotion target role (IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) and IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16)). FIG. 45 (h) shows the execution period. IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) and IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). FIG. 45 (i) shows the execution period of the winning game, FIG. 45 (i) shows the execution period of the game not winning either the promotion target part or the fall target part, and FIG. 45 (j) shows the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Indicates a period during which the stop order is notified.

  First, a description will be given of an ART end branch state that has been shifted in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “0”.

  At the timing t1, one execution of the ART state is completed as shown in FIG. 45A, and the ART end branch state is started as shown in FIG. 45B. In this case, the lottery mode is the second RT mode ST3 as shown in FIG. Further, at the timing of t1, a game that has not won any of the promotion target combination and the fall target combination is started as shown in FIG. 45 (i). In this case, the winning combination is IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). If the winning combination is IV = 22, a normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  Here, in the ART end branch process, if the winning combination in which the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the first RT mode ST2 or the second RT mode ST3, A lottery process of stop order notification for determining whether to execute notification is executed. And when it becomes a notification winning in the lottery process of the stop order notification, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. The probability of winning the notification differs depending on the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more than when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”. The probability that one will win the notification is set higher. In the game started at the timing t1, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the game won for the falling target combination is started. In this case, since the lottery mode is still the second RT mode ST3, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), avoid the establishment of the second falling replay winning as a trigger for the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2. The stop order for this is not notified. The game ends at the timing of t3. In this case, since the second fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 as shown in FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (d).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the game won for the promotion target combination is started. In this case, since the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is “0” as shown in FIG. 45 (f), the first RT mode ST2 is changed to the second RT mode ST3 as shown in FIG. 45 (j). The stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning as a transition opportunity is not notified. Accordingly, in the current game, the second RT replay winning is not established, and the first RT mode ST2 continues in the lottery mode as shown in FIG. 45 (d).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the game won for the falling target combination is started. Since the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “0” as shown in FIG. 45 (f), the transition trigger from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 is shown in FIG. 45 (j). The stop order for avoiding the establishment of the first falling replay winning is not notified. The game ends at the timing of t6. In this case, since the first fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 as shown in FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (e). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the ART end branch state to the normal gaming state.

  Next, a description will be given of an ART end branch state that has been shifted in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more.

  At the timing of t7, one execution of the ART state is completed as shown in FIG. 45 (a), and the ART end branch state is started as shown in FIG. 45 (b). In this case, the lottery mode is the second RT mode ST3 as shown in FIG. Also, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a game that has not been won for either the promotion target combination or the fall target combination is started. In the game, the winning combination is IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). In other words, the winning combination for the normal replay winning is won regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, as already described, the lottery process for stop order notification is executed, and this time the notification is won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the stop order notification determined in the stop order notification lottery process is started at the timing of t7. The normal replay winning is established regardless of whether the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the game won for the falling target combination is started. In this case, since the lottery mode is still the second RT mode ST3, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), avoid the establishment of the second falling replay winning as a trigger for the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2. The stop order for this is not notified. The game ends at the timing of t9. In this case, since the second fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 as shown in FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (d).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a game in which neither the promotion target combination nor the fall target combination is won is started. In the game, the winning combination is IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). In this case, the stop lot notification lottery process is executed as described above, but this time the notification is not won. Therefore, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the game won for the falling target combination is started. As shown in FIG. 45 (f), the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, and as shown in FIG. A stop order for avoiding establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified. Therefore, in the game, establishment of the first fall replay winning is avoided, and the first RT mode ST2 is continued as shown in FIG.

  After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a game that has not won both the promotion target combination and the fall target combination is started. In the game, the winning combination is IV = 11-14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). The corresponding elected role is a bonus opportunity supporter. In the bonus end branch state, when winning the bonus opportunity role, the stop order for preventing the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning from being established, in other words, for establishing the normal replay winning The stop order is notified. Therefore, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified as shown in FIG. In this case, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the notified stop order, establishment of the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning is avoided, and the normal replay winning is established.

  Incidentally, when the bonus opportunity corresponding role is won in the bonus end branch state, the first special replay winning and the second special replay are performed regardless of whether the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. A stop order for avoiding winning is announced. The probability that the stop order is notified in this situation is constant regardless of the value of the remaining ART execution counter.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the game won for the promotion target combination is started. In this case, since the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 45 (f), as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the first RT mode ST2 is switched to the second RT mode ST3. The stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning as a transition opportunity is notified. Then, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order, the lottery mode is set as shown in FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (d) at the timing t14 when the game ends. Transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3, the ART end branch state ends as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), and a new execution of the ART state is started. At the timing t14, as shown in FIG. 45F, the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ART end branch process executed in step S910 in the AT process (FIG. 25). In the ART end branch process, it is determined whether a penalty event in the ART end branch state has occurred (step S2101). The penalty event in the ART end branch state includes any of IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), or the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). This includes winning and winning either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning.

  Further, in the penalty event in the ART end branch state, the role to be promoted (IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) and IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16)) In this case, it is included that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stop order for the promotion generation even though the stop order for the promotion generation is notified in the case of winning. Further, in the penalty event in the ART end branch state, although the winning order for promotion is not notified when IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is won, it is not reported. In addition, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order for promotion. Further, in the penalty event in the ART end branch state, the stop order for avoiding the fall is notified when winning is selected at any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). Nevertheless, this includes that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order for the occurrence of falling.

  If a penalty event in the ART end branch state has occurred (step S2101: YES), “1” is set to the branch penalty flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 (step S2102). The branch penalty flag is a flag for the sub MPU 82 to specify that a penalty event has occurred during the ART end branch state. The branch penalty flag is cleared to “0” when the ART end branch state ends.

  In the ART end branch process, the stop order notification process is executed in step S2103. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the stop order notification process. In the stop order notification process, when a lottery result command indicating that the winning is achieved at any of IV = 1 to 6 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2201: YES), the branching penalty of the sub RAM 84 is determined. On condition that “1” is not set in the flag (step S2202: NO), a stop order setting process for bell winning is executed (step S2203). In the stop order setting process for bell winning, data setting for notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is performed. As a result, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning a prize until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. In this way, by informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the Bell prize, it becomes possible to establish the Bell prize at the time of winning of IV = 1 to 6 in the ART end branch state. Therefore, in the case where the expected number of medals per unit game in the ART end branch state is won in the normal gaming state in which the notification of the stop order for enabling the establishment of the Bell winning is not executed and IV = 1-2 Only the bonus preparation state and the ART preparation state in which the stop order for establishing a bell prize is notified. Note that the state in which the stop order for establishing the bell winning prize is notified in the case of winning in any of IV = 1 to 6 is the first AT state of the sub MPU 82.

  In the stop order notification process, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the predetermined target combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72. The predetermined target combination is IV = 11-14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11-14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). IV = 11-15, and IV = 11-16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20).

  When the lottery result command indicating that the predetermined target combination is won is received (step S2204: YES), the stop order setting process for the predetermined target combination is executed (step S2205). In the stop order setting process for the predetermined target combination, IV = 11-14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11-14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery. In the situation where any of IV = 11 to 15 in the table (FIG. 18) is won, data setting for informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning is performed. In these cases, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the stop for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the order notification is started. In this way, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning is notified, so that the transition to the additional RT mode ST4 and the bonus RT mode ST5 can be avoided.

  In the stop order setting process for the predetermined target combination, in order to make it possible to establish the first fall replay winning if the winning condition is any one of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20). The data setting for informing the stop order is performed. In this case, the first troll replay winning can be established before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that notification of the stop order is started. In the ART termination branch state, the stop order for avoiding the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 will be notified, but in the situation where the bonus opportunity support role is won due to a player's operation error etc., the bonus opportunity support stop It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in order. On the other hand, by actively informing the stop order for establishing the first fall replay winning in the situation where any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won, It is possible to actively cause the transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1.

  In the stop order notification process, when a lottery result command indicating that any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2206: YES). ), Setting processing for a fall trigger is executed (step S2207). In the setting process for the fall opportunity, data setting is performed to execute an effect corresponding to winning of any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode ST3. In this case, the fact that the lottery mode may fall in the current game before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the current game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the suggestion effect is started. During the production, the stop order such as the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay prize and the stop order for establishing the second fall replay prize are not executed. In this case, the player predicts a stop order for preventing the second falling replay winning from being established, and stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the predicted order. Even if establishment of the second fall replay winning is avoided in the game, it does not correspond to a penalty event in the ART end branch state, and similarly, even if the second fall replay winning is established in the game, the ART end branch state It does not fall under the penalty event. The second RT mode ST3 will be continued by avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay winning, and if the replay probability is high and the winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 6, the bell winning is achieved. It is possible to continue the state in which the stop order is notified.

  In the stop order notification process, when a lottery result command indicating that any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2208: YES). ) On the condition that the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is “0” (step S2209: NO), the setting process for the fall trigger is executed (step S2210). In the setting process for the fall opportunity, data setting is performed to execute an effect corresponding to winning of any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode ST2. In this case, the fact that the lottery mode may fall in the current game before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the current game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the suggestion effect is started. In the production, the stop order such as the stop order for avoiding establishment of the first fall replay prize and the stop order for establishing the first fall replay prize is not executed. In this case, the player predicts a stop order for preventing the first fall replay winning from being established, and stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the predicted order. Even if establishment of the first fall replay winning is avoided in the game, it does not correspond to a penalty event in the ART end branch state, and similarly, even if the first fall replay winning is established in the game, the ART end branch state It does not fall under the penalty event. By avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning, the first RT mode ST2 is continued, and when the replay probability is high and winning is made in any of IV = 1 to 6, the bell winning is achieved. It is possible to continue the state in which the stop order is notified.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result command indicating that any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2208: YES), When the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S2209: YES), stop order setting processing for fall prevention is executed. In the stop order setting process for falling prevention, data setting for informing the stop order for enabling establishment of the normal replay winning is performed. In this case, the stop order for enabling the normal replay winning to be established before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that this notification is started. In this way, by notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning, it is possible to avoid the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1.

  In the stop order notification process, in step S2212, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the promotion target combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72. The promotion target combination is IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) and IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16).

  When the lottery result command indicating that the role to be promoted is won is received (step S2212: YES), on condition that the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S2213: YES). Then, stop order setting processing for promotion occurrence is executed (step S2214). In the stop order setting process for the promotion occurrence, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the first RT replay winning when the winning is made in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). The data setting for notifying is performed. In this case, before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the current game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the stop for enabling the establishment of the first RT replay prize. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the order notification is started. In this way, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the first RT replay winning is notified, so that it is possible to shift from the normal mode ST1 to the first RT mode ST2.

  The situation in which the stop order setting process for promotion is executed when winning is selected at any of IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is, for example, the value of the remaining ART execution counter. In the first RT mode ST2, the reels 32L, 32M, etc. have a stop order different from the stop order in spite of being notified of the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning. Occurs when 32R is stopped and the first fall replay winning has been established.

  Further, in the stop order setting process for the promotion occurrence, in order to make it possible to establish the second RT replay winning when the winning combination is IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). The data setting for informing the stop order is performed. In this case, before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the current game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the stop for enabling the establishment of the second RT replay prize. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the order notification is started. In this way, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the second RT replay winning is notified, so that it is possible to shift from the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result command indicating that the promotion target combination is won is received (step S2212: YES), and the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is “0” (step S2213). : NO), a stop order setting process for avoidance is executed (step S2215). In the stop order setting process for avoidance, data setting for notifying the stop order for enabling establishment of the normal replay winning is performed. In this case, the stop order for enabling the normal replay winning to be established before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that this notification is started. In this way, by informing the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning, it becomes possible to avoid the establishment of the second RT replay winning, and the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3 is made possible. This can be avoided.

  In the stop order notification process, in step S2216, a lottery result command indicating that IV = 25 is won in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) or IV = in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). It is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that 22 is won is received from the main MPU 72. The normal replay winning is established at IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) and IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The winning data will be set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2216, a lottery table corresponding to the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is read from the sub ROM 83 (step S2217), and the stop order notification lottery is made using the read lot table. Processing is executed (step S2218). In the lottery process for stop order notification, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the lottery table. . If the result of the lottery process for stop order notification is the result of notification winning (step S2219: YES), a stop order setting process for effects is executed (step S2220). In the stop order setting process for the effect, the stop order to be notified this time is determined by lottery among the six stop orders that exist, and data setting for notifying the stop order determined by the lottery is performed. In this case, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the current game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the notification of the stop order determined by the current lottery is started. Thus, the display of the image display device 66 is controlled. However, either the case where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the notified stop order, or the case where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the notified stop order. However, even if the normal replay winning is established and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the notified stop order, they are not treated as a penalty event in the ART end branch state.

  The lottery table referred to in the stop order notification lottery process is set so that the probabilities of the notification winning results differ according to the value of the remaining ART execution counter. The lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, the lottery table has a notification winning probability of 10% when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “1” or “2”. The notification winning probability in the case is 60%, the notification winning probability in the case where the remaining ART execution counter value is “3” or “4” is 80%, and the notification in the case where the remaining ART execution counter value is 5 or more The winning probability is set to be 100%.

  In this case, when the winning is achieved with IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) or IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”. In the case where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, it is possible to increase the probability that the stop order notification for the effect is executed. With such a configuration, the probability that a new execution time in the ART state is started increases as the stop order is notified in the ART end branch state and the normal replay winning is established. Therefore, the player plays the game in expectation that many notifications of the stop order are generated in the ART end branch state, and the game can be improved in the ART end branch state.

  In addition, when the winning combination is IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) or IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), the value of the remaining ART execution counter is a large value. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability that the stop order notification for the effect is executed. With such a configuration, the probability that the number of executions of the ART state remains increases as the stop order is notified in the ART end branch state and the normal replay winning is established. Therefore, the player plays the game in expectation that many notifications of the stop order are generated in the ART end branch state, and the game can be improved in the ART end branch state.

  Here, in the ART termination branch state, IV = 11-14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11-14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table. When any of IV = 11 to 15 in FIG. 18 is won, the stop order for enabling the normal replay winning is established regardless of the value of the remaining ART execution counter. On the other hand, as described above, the more frequently the stop order for establishing the normal replay winning in the ART end branch state is notified, the higher the probability that a new execution time of the ART state will occur. As a result, the stop order notification that is executed in order to avoid the transition of the lottery mode to the additional RT mode ST4 and bonus RT mode ST5 in the ART end branch state is used as an effect for enhancing the player's expectation. It becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of the ART end branch process (FIG. 46), in the ART end branch process, a prize indicating that the game is won in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). When the result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2104: YES), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning (step S2105: YES), and further the sub side On condition that the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S2106: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S2107), and the AT state of the sub RAM 84 “4” is set in the counter (step S2108). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes an ART state process (step S909) described later in the next AT process (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state.

  In the ART end branch process, when a winning result command indicating that the game is won in any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is received from the main MPU 72 ( (Step S2109: YES), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order for establishing the first fall replay winning (step S2110: YES), and the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is “0”. (Step S2111: YES), the value of the AT state counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0” (step S2112). As a result, the sub MPU 82 executes non-AT processing (step S704) from the next periodic process (FIG. 23), and the control state of the sub MPU 82 returns from the first AT state to the non-AT state.

  As described above, the control state of the sub MPU 82 is changed to the first AT state by changing the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 to the second RT mode ST3 in a situation where the conditions for enabling the transition to the ART state are satisfied, and the gaming state is ART. It becomes a state. In the ART state, the ART state processing (FIG. 44) is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. As a result, a state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the expected number of medals per unit game is increased continues for a plurality of games, which is advantageous to the player.

  When one execution time in the ART state ends, the state shifts to the ART end branch state regardless of whether a condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied. In the ART end branch state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the first RT mode ST2 regardless of whether a condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied. When the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3, whereby a new execution time in the ART state is started. On the other hand, when the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is not satisfied, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1, thereby ending the ART end branch state. As described above, the ART end branch state is executed regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution state of the ART state is satisfied, so that the ART state is changed every time one execution state of the ART state ends. It becomes possible for the player to expect the occurrence of a new execution time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the ART end branch state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the first RT mode ST2 regardless of whether a condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied. In order for the fall to the first RT mode ST2 to occur, it is necessary to establish the second fall replay winning in the game that is won at any of IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18). . Also, in the ART end branch state, when the falling target combination is won, notification of the stop order for establishing the second fall replay prize and notification of the stop order for avoiding establishment of the second fall replay prize are performed. In a game that is not executed and is further elected to the fall target role, a notification that allows the player to recognize that the game is a fall target role is started at the start of the game and is being stopped as the first stop Even if the reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped, no penalty event occurs. This makes it possible to continue the ART end branch state that is advantageous to the player for a long time depending on the player's luck.

  In particular, even if the condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied, an ART end branch state occurs, and the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 temporarily falls to the first RT mode ST2 for lottery. In a situation where a condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is established by starting a new execution time in the ART state when the mode is promoted again to the second RT mode ST3. An advantageous state in which the number of continued games changes depending on the player's luck between one execution time and the next execution time in the ART state, and it is possible to increase the player's profit.

  Even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, even if the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the normal mode ST1 in the ART end branch state, the new execution time in the ART state is The state where the condition for starting is satisfied is maintained. As a result, it is possible to bring about the effect of shifting to the ART end branch state without losing the benefit of starting a new execution time in the ART state.

  However, if the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the normal mode ST1 in the ART end branch state under the condition that a new execution time of the ART state is started, the advantage in the ART end branch state is descend. As a result, it is possible to penalize that the fall to the normal mode ST1 has occurred even though the fall to the normal mode ST1 can be avoided.

  In the ART end branch state, when the condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied, the winning is selected at any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). If the game is a game, the stop order is notified to avoid the first falling replay winning, and the winning is selected at IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). If the game is a game, the stop order notification for establishing the second RT replay winning is executed. In this case, in the ART end branch state, the stop order is notified even if the game is not won in any of IV = 15 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the notification of the stop order is executed in a situation where the condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied, and starts a new execution of the ART state. Even in a situation where the conditions to be executed are not satisfied, the stop order can be notified at a certain frequency. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the player's degree of attention to the stop order notification being executed in the ART end branch state.

  In the ART end branch state, when the condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied, there is a higher probability that a notification of the stop order at which the normal replay winning will be established will occur. As a result, in the ART end branch state, the player plays the game while expecting the notification of the stop order, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the ART termination branch state, if the winning is achieved with IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) or IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “ When the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the probability that the stop order for production is notified is higher than the case of “0”. Thereby, the probability that a new execution time in the ART state is started increases as the stop order is notified in the ART end branch state and the normal replay winning is established. Therefore, the player plays the game in expectation that many notifications of the stop order are generated in the ART end branch state, and the game can be improved in the ART end branch state.

  In the ART end branch state, if the winning is achieved with IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) or IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), the value of the remaining ART execution counter In the case where is a larger value, there is a higher probability that the stop order for the production will be notified. Thereby, the probability that the number of executions in the ART state remains increases as the stop order is notified in the ART end branch state and the normal replay winning is established. Therefore, the player plays the game in expectation that many notifications of the stop order are generated in the ART end branch state, and the game can be improved in the ART end branch state.

  In the ART termination branch state, IV = 11-14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11-14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). When IV = 11 to 15 is won, the stop order for enabling the normal replay winning is established regardless of the value of the remaining ART execution counter. On the other hand, as described above, the higher the frequency with which the stop order for establishing the normal replay winning is notified in the ART end branch state, the higher the probability that a new execution time in the ART state will occur. As a result, the stop order notification that is executed in order to avoid the transition of the lottery mode to the additional RT mode ST4 and bonus RT mode ST5 in the ART end branch state is used as an effect for enhancing the player's expectation. It becomes possible.

<External output from slot machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 49A is a schematic view for explaining an outline of the electrical configuration of a gaming hall in which a number of slot machines 10 are installed, and FIG. 49B is an external terminal plate 90 provided in the slot machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a number of slot machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. In the island facility S, a data counter DC is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with each slot machine 10. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding slot machine 10, and displays the number of times the game has been executed since the second RT mode ST3 or the bonus RT mode ST5 is finished and the normal mode ST1 is started. The first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the 2RT mode ST3, and the number of times the bonus state is executed (IV = 1 to 6 is 20). The second display portion DC2 for displaying the number of occurrences of the bonus state is completed), and the ART state execution times (when the ART game number counter is “0”, one execution of the ART state) And a third display unit DC3 for displaying the number of occurrences).

  As a management control means for managing each slot machine 10 and each data counter DC, a hall computer HC is provided in the game hall. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and an MPU 201 is mounted therein. The MPU 201 temporarily stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and ROM 202 storing fixed value data, and various data and information input from the slot machine 10 when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. And a RAM 203 which is a memory for storing the data.

  The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each slot machine 10 through an electrical wiring group EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through an electrical wiring group EL2. Then, the management process based on the information received from each slot machine 10 is executed, and a signal corresponding to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

  Here, a configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49B, the external terminal plate 90 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 90a to 90h. The main side MPU 72 is electrically connected to the external terminals 90a to 90h of the external terminal board 90 in a one-to-one correspondence through the electric wiring group EL3, and a predetermined voltage is applied to the external terminals 90a to 90h according to the processing result. Output a signal. A total of eight external terminals 90a to 90h are provided, and the types of information output to the hall computer HC are different.

  Specifically, in order to output information indicating the number of medals awarded in each game, and an external terminal 90a for insertion signals used for outputting information indicating the number of bets of the game for each game. An external terminal 90b for an applied signal used for the operation, an external terminal 90c for an abnormal signal used for outputting information indicating that the slot machine 10 has detected an illegal occurrence such as an input abnormality or an abnormal discharge, and a setting An external terminal 90d for a setting operation signal used for outputting information indicating that the change operation is being executed, and an opening signal used for outputting information indicating that the front door 12 is being opened. An external terminal 90e, an external terminal 90f for a settlement signal used for outputting information indicating that a medal is being settled, and a bonus RT mode ST5. An external terminal 90g for a bonus signal used for outputting information indicating that the external signal is present, and an external terminal 90h for an ART medium signal used for outputting information indicating the second RT mode ST3. include.

  Among these, the number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of bets is output from the input signal external terminal 90a. Specifically, at the start of one game, the pulse signal is output three times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec. The hall computer HC determines that one game has started by receiving a group of pulse signals from the input signal external terminal 90a, and displays the number of times the game has been executed on the first display portion DC1 of the data counter DC. 1 is added.

  The number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of payouts is output from the external terminal 90b for giving signals. For example, when nine medals or virtual medals are awarded, a pulse signal is output nine times so that the ON time and OFF time are each 50 msec at the end of one game, and four medals or virtual medals. Is provided, the pulse signal is output four times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the end of one game. In the hall computer HC, the number of medals or virtual medals to be paid out in the corresponding slot machine 10 is managed based on the number of pulse signals received from the external terminal 90b for the given signal. For example, the one-sun ball management of the corresponding slot machine 10 is performed.

  The abnormal signal external terminal 90c, the setting operation signal external terminal 90d, the open signal external terminal 90e, and the settlement signal external terminal 90f are in the ON state while the target event occurs. Is maintained. The setting operation signal external terminal 90d may be configured to output an ON signal not only during a setting change operation but also during a current setting value confirmation operation. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs both an abnormal signal and a setting operation signal from one external terminal. The hall computer HC manages the state of the corresponding slot machine 10 based on the reception status of signals from these external terminals 90c to 90f.

  The external terminal 90g for a bonus signal is used to make it possible for the hall computer HC to recognize the number of times the bonus state is executed. The hall computer HC determines that the execution of the bonus state has been newly started by confirming the rising edge of the signal from the external terminal 90g for the bonus medium signal, and the bonus state in the second display portion DC2 of the data counter DC. 1 is added to the display of the number of occurrences of. Further, the hall computer HC determines that one execution of the bonus state has been completed by confirming the falling of the signal from the external terminal 90g for the bonus medium signal, and in the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC. Clear the display to “0”.

  The external terminal 90h for the ART signal is used to enable the hall computer HC to recognize the number of execution times of the ART state. The hall computer HC determines that the execution of the ART state is newly started by confirming the rising of the signal from the external terminal 90h for the ART signal, and the ART state in the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC 1 is added to the display of the number of occurrences of the execution times, and the display on the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC is cleared to “0”. The hall computer HC determines that one execution of the ART state has been completed by confirming the falling of the signal from the external terminal 90h for the ART signal, and in the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC. Clear the display to “0”.

<External output setting process>
Processing for performing ON / OFF control of the bonus signal and ON / OFF control of the ART signal will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the external output setting process executed in step S212 in the normal process (FIG. 9) of the main MPU 72.

  First, processing for performing ON / OFF control of the bonus medium signal will be described.

  In the external output setting process, if the bonus signal is in the OFF state (step S2301: NO), it is determined in step S2302 whether the OFF duration is being measured. In the OFF duration period, when one execution time of the bonus state is completed and a new execution time of the bonus state is immediately started, the state of the bonus medium signal is switched from ON state to OFF state to ON state. This is a period set to maintain an intermediate OFF state for a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). By maintaining the OFF state for a predetermined period in this way, even when a new execution time of the bonus state is immediately started after one execution time of the bonus state is completed, It becomes possible for the hall computer HC to clearly recognize the rising of the bonus signal during the bonus state to the ON state.

  If the OFF duration is not being measured (step S2302: NO), it is determined in step S2303 whether or not “1” is set in the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74. As described above, the process for setting the bonus output start flag to “1” is performed in step S1103 in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) of the main MPU 72 when the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 occurs. In addition, the process is executed in step S1806 in the end branch process (FIG. 42) of the main MPU 72 when a new execution time continuation condition for the bonus state is satisfied. If “1” is set in the bonus output start flag (step S2303: YES), the bonus medium signal is set to ON and the bonus output start flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S2303: YES). S2304).

  In the external output setting process, when the bonus signal is ON (step S2301: YES), it is determined in step S2305 whether or not “1” is set in the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74. The situation where the bonus output start flag is set to “1” when the bonus signal is ON is that a new execution time of the bonus state is immediately started after one execution time of the bonus state ends. It is a situation to do. When “1” is set in the bonus output start flag (step S2305: YES), a value corresponding to the OFF continuation period (for example, 1 sec) is set in the OFF continuation period counter provided in the main RAM 74. The value set in the OFF duration counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Further, the bonus medium signal is set to the OFF state (step S2307).

  If the bonus medium signal is ON and “1” is not set in the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2301: YES, step S2305: NO), the main side is determined in step S2308. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the bonus output end flag of the RAM 74. As described above, the process for setting the bonus output end flag to “1” is mainly performed when one execution time in the bonus state ends in a situation where the condition for continuing the new execution time in the bonus state is not satisfied. This is executed in step S1803 in the end branch process (FIG. 42) of the side MPU 72. If the bonus output end flag is set to “1” (step S2308: YES), the bonus medium signal is set to the OFF state and the bonus output end flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S2308: YES). S2309).

  As described above, when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5, the bonus medium signal is set to the ON state regardless of whether the gaming state is the bonus state or not, and the bonus RT mode ST5 is started. When the game won by IV = 1-6 is executed for the number of games corresponding to the value set in the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74, the bonus medium signal is set to the OFF state. The In order to shift to the bonus RT mode ST5, it is necessary to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the stop order corresponding to the bonus trigger in the game that is won as the bonus trigger corresponding role in the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72. There is. In this case, the stop order corresponding to the bonus trigger does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L in the first stop, and if the conditions for enabling the transition to the bonus state are not satisfied, The stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity is not notified in the game won. Further, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the situation where the control state of the sub MPU 82 is the non-AT state, a penalty is imposed on the player and the control state of the sub MPU 82 is the first stop. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the situation where the 2AT state is not executed and the stop order is not notified, a penalty is imposed on the player. Therefore, the probability that the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 is low in a situation where the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is not satisfied. In such circumstances, when the bonus RT mode ST5 is started, the bonus medium signal is set to the ON state, and when the condition set as the end condition for one execution of the bonus state is satisfied, the bonus medium signal is set. By adopting a configuration in which the state is set to the OFF state, it is unnecessary to output a signal from the sub MPU 82 to the main MPU 72 for executing the monitoring process to determine whether or not the condition for enabling the transition to the bonus state is satisfied. It is possible to set the bonus in-progress signal to the ON state in correspondence with the situation where the execution round is started.

  In addition, when the bonus execution signal is in the ON state and a new execution time of the bonus state is started, the bonus in-progress signal is set after the OFF duration period has elapsed after the bonus in-progress signal is once set to the OFF state. Set it to ON again. Thereby, even if a new execution time of the bonus state is continuously executed after one execution time of the bonus state is completed, the bonus medium signal is changed from the OFF state to the ON state in correspondence with each execution time of the bonus state. It is possible to cause changes. Thereby, in the hall computer HC, it is possible to identify the number of times the bonus state is executed by grasping the number of times the bonus signal has changed from the OFF state to the ON state.

  Next, processing for performing ON / OFF control of the ART signal will be described.

  In the external output setting process, when the ART signal is in the OFF state (step S2310: NO), it is determined in step S2311 whether or not “1” is set in the ART output start flag of the main RAM 74. . As described above, the process of setting the ART output start flag to “1” is performed in step S609 in the lottery mode transition process (FIG. 22) of the main MPU 72 when the transition to the second RT mode ST3 occurs. Executed. If “1” is set in the ART output start flag (step S2311: YES), the ART signal is set to ON and the ART output start flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S2311: YES). S2312).

  In the external output setting process, if the ART signal is in the ON state (step S2310: YES), the ART signal is set to the OFF state on condition that the lottery mode is the first RT mode ST2 (step S2313: YES). (Step S2314).

  As described above, when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the second RT mode ST3, the ART signal is set to the ON state regardless of whether the gaming state is the ART state, and the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is determined. Is shifted to the first RT mode ST2, the ART signal is set to the OFF state. In order to shift to the second RT mode ST3, it is necessary to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the stop order for the promotion occurrence in the game that has won the role to be promoted in the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72. is there. In this case, the stop order for the occurrence of promotion does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L in the first stop, and if the conditions for enabling the transition to the ART state are not satisfied, the stop target is promoted. In the winning game, the stop order for promotion is not notified. Further, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the situation where the control state of the sub MPU 82 is the non-AT state, a penalty is imposed on the player and the control state of the sub MPU 82 is the first stop. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the situation where the 2AT state is not executed and the stop order is not notified, a penalty is imposed on the player. Accordingly, the probability that the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 in a situation where the conditions for enabling the transition to the ART state are not satisfied is low. In such a situation, when the second RT mode ST3 is started, the ART signal is set to the ON state, and when the first RT mode ST2 is entered, the ART signal is set to the OFF state. In response to the start of one execution of the ART state, it is unnecessary to output a signal from the sub-side MPU 82 to the main-side MPU 72 for executing the monitoring process for determining whether or not the condition for enabling the transition to the ART state is satisfied. Thus, the ART signal can be set to the ON state.

  Further, as described above, when one execution time of the ART state is finished in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the main side does not immediately start a new execution time of the ART state. When the lottery mode of the MPU 72 temporarily shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2, and then the lottery mode shifts again to the second RT mode ST3, a new execution of the ART state is started. As a result, even if a new execution time of the ART state is continuously executed after one execution time of the ART state is completed, the signal during the ART is changed from the OFF state to the ON state corresponding to each execution time of the ART state. It is possible to cause changes. Thereby, in the hall computer HC, it is possible to identify the number of times of execution of the ART state by grasping the number of times that the ART signal has changed from the OFF state to the ON state.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the bonus state, the continuous lottery process is executed when winning is achieved at any of IV = 7 to 10, and when the result of the continuous lottery process becomes the continuous winning result, a new execution time of the bonus state is executed. The condition for starting is established. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that a continuous winning result will be generated in the bonus state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, at the timing when the continuous lottery process is executed, the result of the lottery is not notified to the player, and the result of the continuous lottery process is collectively notified during the continuous chance period that occurs in the final game in the bonus state. . As a result, the period during which the result of the continuous lottery process is notified can be aggregated into the continuation chance period, and a period in which the degree of attention of the player who expects the continuous winning result to be generated can be generated. In addition, according to the configuration, it is possible to let the player expect that the continuous lottery process is executed until the continuous chance period starts and that the result of the continuous lottery process becomes the continuous winning result. In the chance period, it is possible to expect the notification that the continuous winning result is obtained, so that it is possible to change the target that the player pays attention in the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  In the continuation chance period, after the game start condition is satisfied and the lottery process for the winning combination in the game (FIG. 10) is executed, the reels 32L and 32M are subjected to stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process. , 32R occurs in a period in which the start of rotation is blocked. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the unit effect executed during the continuation chance period. In this case, the duration of each unit presentation is adjusted according to the number of executions of the unit presentation within the range in which the duration of the continuation chance period is fixed, or the number of executions of the unit presentation is not adjusted. The continuation period of the continuation chance period varies depending on the number of executions. Thereby, the freedom degree of design regarding the content of the unit effect of each execution time and the frequency | count of the unit effect performed in a continuation chance period is raised.

  In the continuous chance period, basically, the unit effect is executed once for one lottery result data of the continuous lottery process, and in the continuous chance period, it corresponds to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10). In the configuration in which the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which stop control to be executed is prevented, when the cancel operation is executed by the player, the unit effect executed in the continuation chance period The number of times will decrease. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of unit effects executed during the continuation chance period from being increased more than necessary. In addition, even if the number of unit effects executed in the continuous chance period decreases, the number of executions of the continuous lottery process and the result of the continuous lottery process are not affected, so the player's profit is not lost. It is possible to prevent the number of unit effects executed in the chance period from becoming more than necessary.

  The continuation chance period occurs in a game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. Further, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect becomes the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result, and then a new bonus state is added. Execution times are started. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed as the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R immediately before the new execution time of the bonus state is started, so the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed. It becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the display corresponds to the start of a new execution time in the bonus state.

  When one execution time in the ART state ends, the state shifts to the ART end branch state regardless of whether a condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied. In the ART end branch state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the first RT mode ST2 regardless of whether a condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied. When the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3, whereby a new execution time in the ART state is started. On the other hand, when the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is not satisfied, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1, thereby ending the ART end branch state. As described above, the ART end branch state is executed regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution state of the ART state is satisfied, so that the ART state is changed every time one execution state of the ART state ends. It becomes possible for the player to expect the occurrence of a new execution time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the ART end branch state, when the condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied, the winning is selected at any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). If the game is a game, the stop order is notified to avoid the first falling replay winning, and the winning is selected at IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). If the game is a game, the stop order notification for establishing the second RT replay winning is executed. In this case, in the ART end branch state, the stop order is notified even if the game is not won in any of IV = 15 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the notification of the stop order is executed in a situation where the condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied, and starts a new execution of the ART state. Even in a situation where the conditions to be executed are not satisfied, the stop order can be notified at a certain frequency. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the player's degree of attention to the stop order notification being executed in the ART end branch state.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for executing and controlling the continuation chance period in the bonus state is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different processing configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a storage area of the main RAM 74 used by the main MPU 72 to execute the continuation chance period.

  In the present embodiment, as the area used by the main MPU 72 for executing the continuation chance period, the main RAM 74 stores the first and fourth determination areas 101a to 104a and the first to fourth determination counters 101b. To 104b and the success / failure determination counter 105 are not provided. Instead, the main side RAM 74 is elected with the first lottery counter 111 for storing the number of times the continuous lottery process should be executed when IV = 7 is won, and is won with IV = 8. The second lottery counter 112 for storing the number of times that the continuous lottery process should be executed with this as an opportunity, and the number of times that the continuous lottery process should be executed when IV = 9 is won There is provided a third lottery counter 113 and a fourth lottery counter 114 for storing the number of times that the continuous lottery process is to be executed when the winning is achieved with IV = 10.

  In other words, in the first embodiment, when a winning is made at any of IV = 7 to 10 in a period before the continuing chance period in the bonus state, the continuous lottery process is performed in the game in which the winning combination is won. The lottery results are stored and retained, and the unit effects corresponding to the lottery results are executed in the continuous chance period. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when winning is made at any of IV = 7 to 10 in the period before the continuation chance period in the bonus state, the main MPU 72 is informed that the continuation lottery process should be executed. The data setting for specifying is performed, and the continuous lottery process is collectively executed in the continuous chance period on the condition that the data setting is performed.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the bonus RT management process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

  In the bonus RT management process, as in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, when the bonus RT start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” (step S2401: YES), “20” is set in the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74, the bonus RT start flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0”, and the bonus RT flag in the main RAM 74 is set to “1” (step S2402). Further, “1” is set to the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2403).

  In the bonus RT management process, when “1” is set in the bonus RT flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2404: YES), IV = 7˜ in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) in this game. On the condition that the winning combination is made in any of 10 (step S2405: YES), the stored lottery table corresponding to the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S2406). Then, a storage lottery process is executed (step S2407). In the storage lottery process, the value of the main lottery counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the main RAM 74 is read out, and the value of the main lottery counter is checked against the stored lottery table. The storage lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the values of IV = 7-10. When IV = 7, the storage lottery process results in a storage win with a probability of 70%. IV = In the case of 8, the storage winning result is 80% probability in the storage lottery process. In the case of IV = 9, the storage winning result is 90% in the storage lottery process. In the case of IV = 10, the storage winning result is stored. Each stored lottery table is set so that a storage winning result is obtained with a probability of 100% in the lottery process.

  In the case where the winning result is stored (step S2408: YES), in step S2409, the value of the lottery counter corresponding to the winning combination among the first to fourth lottery counters 111 to 114 of the main RAM 74 is determined. 1 is added. That is, if the game is won by IV = 7, the value of the first lottery counter 111 is incremented by 1. If the game is won by IV = 8, the value of the second lottery counter 112 is incremented by 1. If the game is won by IV = 9, the value of the third lottery counter 113 is incremented by 1. If the game is won by IV = 10, the value of the fourth lottery counter 114 is incremented by 1. To do. As a result, one is added to the number of times that the continuous lottery process corresponding to the winning combination this time among IV = 7 to 10 should be executed.

  Here, as described above, the storage lottery process is not always executed when winning is made at any of IV = 7 to 10, but is won at any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode ST5. It is executed only when When the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 due to the stop operation corresponding to the player's penalty event even though the sub MPU 82 is in the non-AT state, the first fall in the bonus RT mode ST5 The lottery mode immediately falls to the normal mode ST1 because the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the replay winning is not notified. In this case, the main lottery MPU 72 is executed in a situation where the game state is not in the bonus state by performing the storage lottery process only when the winning lottery process is won in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode ST5. Even if the processing after step S2405 in the bonus RT management processing (FIG. 52) is executed, the probability that the storage lottery processing is executed in this situation can be lowered. Then, by reducing the probability that the storage lottery process is executed in this way, the probability that a continuation chance period will occur in a situation where the gaming state is not the bonus state and the new execution times of the bonus state are continuously executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of being done.

  In the bonus RT management process, if the current game is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 regardless of the type of the lottery mode (step S2410: YES), regardless of whether or not the bell winning is achieved. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the bell establishment counter in the main RAM 74 (step S2411). If the value of the bell establishment counter after subtracting 1 is “0” (step S2412: YES), it means that the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 has reached the end reference game number. To do. In this case, an end branch process for determining the control state in the subsequent main MPU 72 is executed (step S2413). The content of the end branch process is the same as the end branch process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the continuation chance process in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

  In the continuation chance process, other processes are executed in step S2501. In other processes, the processes of steps S1401 to S1407, steps S1418, and S1419 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, on condition that the first credit insertion button 47 is operated as the start operation of the unit effect or the start limit period during the current measurement has elapsed (step S2502 or step S2503: YES), step S2504 The following unit effect start processing is executed.

  In the unit effect start process, first, a lottery target specifying process is executed (step S2504). In the lottery target specifying process, when the value of the fourth lottery counter 114 in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, the fourth lottery counter 114 is specified as the lottery target, and the fourth lottery counter in the main RAM 74 is determined. When the value of 114 is “0” and the value of the third lottery counter 113 is 1 or more, the third lottery counter 113 is specified as a lottery object, and the third lottery counter 113 of the main RAM 74 is determined. When the value of the second lottery counter 112 is 1 or more, the second lottery counter 112 is specified as a lottery target, and the second lottery counter 112 of the main RAM 74 When the value is “0” and the value of the first lottery counter 111 is 1 or more, the first lottery counter 111 is specified as a lottery target.

  Thereafter, the value of the lottery counter 111-114 specified as the current lottery target is decremented by 1 (step S2505). Further, the continuous lottery table corresponding to the current lottery object is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S2506). Then, a continuous lottery process is executed (step S2507). In the continuous lottery process, the value of the main lottery counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the main RAM 74 is read, and the value of the main lottery counter is checked against the continuous lottery table. The continuous lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the values of IV = 7 to 10, and in the case of IV = 7, the continuous lottery process results in a continuous winning result with a probability of 10%. In the case of 8, a continuous winning result is obtained with a probability of 20% in the continuous lottery process. In the case of IV = 9, the continuous winning result is obtained with a probability of 30% in the continuous lottery process. Each continuous lottery table is set so that a continuous winning result is obtained with a probability of 40% in the lottery process.

  Here, as already described, the priority lottery processing is performed in the order of the fourth lottery counter 114 → the third lottery counter 113 → the second lottery counter 112 → the first lottery counter 111 in the order of the first lottery process. It becomes. On the other hand, the probability of a continuous winning result in the continuous lottery process is higher for the lottery number counters 111 to 114 having higher priority during digestion. As a result, since the lottery counters 111 to 114 on the side having the higher probability of the continuous winning result are sequentially selected as execution targets of the continuous lottery process, the probability that the unit effect that becomes the continuous winning result is executed early. Can be increased.

  If the result of the continuous lottery process is a result of continuous losing (step S2508: NO), the driving table corresponding to the continual losing result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and permission setting for rotation drive control is performed ( Step S2509). Further, “1” is set to the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74 and the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S2510). The processing contents of step S2509 and step S2510 are the same as step S1412 and step S1413 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Thereby, the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  On the other hand, if the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result (step S2508: YES), the driving table corresponding to the continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the permission setting for the rotational drive control is set. This is performed (step S2511). In addition, “1” is set to the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74 and “1” is set to the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 (step S2512). The processing contents of steps S2511 and S2512 are the same as steps S1414 and S1415 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Thereby, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In the case of the present embodiment described in detail above, when winning is made at any of IV = 7 to 10 in the period before the continuation chance period in the bonus state, the main MPU 72 is informed that the continuation lottery process should be executed. The data setting for specifying is performed, and the continuous lottery process is collectively executed in the continuous chance period on the condition that the data setting is performed. In this case, although it is necessary to repeatedly execute the continuous lottery process during the continuous chance period, it is possible to shorten the period for storing and holding the result of the continuous lottery process, so the lottery corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process It is possible to reduce the possibility that the result data is rewritten due to electrical noise or the like.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the subsequent progression mode of the continuation chance period when the cancel operation is executed is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a canceling process in the present embodiment that is executed by the main MPU 72.

  In the canceling process, a storage area specifying process is first executed (step S2601). In the storage area specifying process, the same process as the storage area specifying process (FIG. 38) in step S1410 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment is executed. Thereby, the lottery result data set in the read target bit in the storage area with the higher priority among the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74 is read. When the lottery result data is read in the storage area specifying process, it is determined whether or not the read lottery result data corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S2602).

  If it corresponds to the continuation loss result (step S2602: NO), the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area is shifted as in step S1416 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is executed (step S2603). Thereby, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In addition, the process of overwriting the mth bit with the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit for the storage areas 101a to 104a that have been read the lottery result data this time is executed. Thereafter, in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 in the main RAM 74 is “0”. When the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105 is 1 or more, the process returns to step S2601, and when the value of the determination result counter 105 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2605.

  In step S2605, the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, a cancel command corresponding to the continuation error result is set (step S2606). The cancellation command corresponding to the continuation loss result is that the occurrence of the cancel operation is effectively accepted during the continuation chance period, and the lottery result data corresponding to the continuation winning result is included in the lottery result data that is the current determination target. This command is transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp that it did not exist.

  The processing content of the sub-MPU 82 when the cancel command corresponding to the continuation error result is received will be described. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the sub-side MPU 82. If the sub-side MPU 82 receives a cancel command corresponding to the continuation failure result (step S2701: YES), the sub-side MPU 82 executes setting processing corresponding to the continuation failure result (step S2702). In the setting process corresponding to the continuous losing result, in order to make it possible for the player to recognize that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result does not exist in the lottery result data subject to the determination by the cancel operation. The data is set to execute the above effect by the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66. Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 55 (b), an effect for enabling the player to recognize that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result does not exist is executed.

  Returning to the description of the canceling process (FIG. 54), if it is determined in step S2602 that the result of the continuous winning is supported (step S2602: YES), the continuous chance process in the first embodiment (FIG. 37). Similarly to step S1416, counter subtraction processing and storage area shift processing are executed (step S2607). Thereby, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In addition, the process of overwriting the mth bit with the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit for the storage areas 101a to 104a that have been read the lottery result data this time is executed.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 (step S2608), and a cancel command corresponding to the continuous winning result is set (step S2609). The cancellation command corresponding to the continuous winning result means that the occurrence of the cancel operation is effectively accepted during the continuous chance period, and the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included in the lottery result data that is the current determination target. This command is transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp that it exists.

  The processing contents of the sub MPU 82 when the cancel command corresponding to the continuous winning result is received will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a) again. When the sub MPU 82 receives the cancel command corresponding to the continuous winning result (step S2703: YES), the sub MPU 82 executes the setting process corresponding to the continuous winning result (step S2704). In the setting process corresponding to the continuous winning result, in order to make it possible for the player to recognize that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result was present in the lottery result data subject to the determination by the cancel operation. Data is set to execute an effect on the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66. Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 55 (c), an effect for enabling the player to recognize that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result existed is executed. In the other processes of step S2705 in the bonus state process, the processes of steps S1201 to S1220 of the bonus state process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Here, in this embodiment, when a cancel operation is executed, a plurality of lottery result data are collectively specified, but a unit effect using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not executed for the specified result. The specific result is notified as an effect using the image display device 66. On the other hand, when the cancel operation is not performed, a unit effect using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed every time the lottery result data becomes a specific target. As a result, when the cancel operation is performed, the player is notified whether or not the continuous winning result is obtained in a manner different from the case where the cancel operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether or not the cancel operation has been accepted effectively, and to clearly distinguish between the normal unit effect and the effect at the time of the cancel operation. .

  Further, when the cancel operation is executed, the specific result of the lottery result data is notified as the effect using the image display device 66 without executing the unit effect using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the operation is executed, it is possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high even if the specific process of the lottery result data can be repeatedly executed.

  When the main MPU 72 executes the process of step S2606 or step S2609, the continuation chance period is ended by clearing the continuation chance flag in the main RAM 74 to “0”, and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that causes the stop control corresponding to is started. In this case, in a situation where the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are being rotated, notification corresponding to the specified result of the lottery result data at the time of the cancel operation is executed by the image display device 66. According to this configuration, it is possible to end the continuation chance period early when a cancel operation is performed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the subsequent progression mode of the continuation chance period when the cancel operation is executed is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a continuation chance process in the present embodiment that is executed by the main MPU 72. In steps S2801 to S2806 and steps S2808 to S2818 in the continuous chance processing, the same processing as steps S1401 to S1406 and steps S1408 to S1418 of the continuous chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment is performed. Run. On the other hand, in step S2807, it is determined not only whether or not a cancel operation has been performed, but also whether or not “1” is set to the canceling flag in the main RAM 74. The canceling flag indicates that there is lottery result data that is not yet a specific target at the time of cancellation in a situation where the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is not executed when the cancel operation is received effectively. This is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72. If the cancel operation is being executed or if the canceling flag in the main RAM 74 is set to “1” (step S2807: YES), the cancel process is executed in step S2819.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a canceling process in the present embodiment that is executed by the main MPU 72.

  In the cancel processing, first, a cancel command is set (step S2901). The processing contents of the sub-side MPU 82 when the cancel command is set are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, the storage area specifying process (FIG. 38) is executed (step S2902) in the same manner as step S1410 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Thereby, the lottery result data set in the read target bit in the storage area with the higher priority among the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74 is read. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current read target bit corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S2903).

  When it corresponds to the continuation loss result (step S2903: NO), similarly to step S1416 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area is shifted. Processing is executed (step S2904). Thereby, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In addition, the process of overwriting the mth bit with the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit for the storage areas 101a to 104a that have been read the lottery result data this time is executed. Thereafter, in step S2905, it is determined whether or not the values of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a that have read the lottery result data this time are “0”. If the value of the corresponding determination number counter 101b to 104 is 1 or more, the process returns to step S2903. If the value of the corresponding determination number counter 101b to 104b is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2906.

  In step S2906, by determining whether or not the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 is “0”, are there any storage areas 101a to 104a in which lottery result data that is not a specific target remains? Determine whether or not. If the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 is not “0” (step S2906: NO), “1” is set to the canceling flag in the main RAM 74 (step S2907). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2807 even if a cancel operation is not newly performed in the processing times of the continuation chance process (FIG. 56) after the end of the unit effect for which the start setting has been made this time. The process will be executed again.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2906, or if the process of step S2907 is executed, the drive table corresponding to the continuation error result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and permission setting for rotation drive control is performed ( Step S2908). Further, “1” is set to the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74 and the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S2909). The processing contents of these steps S2908 and S2909 are the same as steps S1412 and S1413 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Thereby, the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  On the other hand, if the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result (step S2903: YES), the counter subtraction process is executed in the same manner as in step S1416 of the continuous chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. At the same time, storage area shift processing is executed (step S2910). Thereby, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In addition, the process of overwriting the mth bit with the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit for the storage areas 101a to 104a that have been read the lottery result data this time is executed.

  Thereafter, the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written in the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission is set (step S2911). Also, “1” is set to the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74 and “1” is set to the bonus continuation flag in the main RAM 74 (step S2912). The processing contents of step S2911 and step S2912 are the same as step S1414 and step S1415 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Thereby, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In the case of the present embodiment described in detail above, if the cancel operation for the continuation chance period is performed, even if the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result is not executed, the success / failure result first to fourth storage areas 101a to 101a. A unit effect is executed once for each storage area of 104a. This makes it possible to increase the number of times that the unit effect is executed even when the cancel operation is executed, and increase the expectation that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result will be executed. It becomes possible.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the subsequent progression mode of the continuation chance period when the cancel operation is executed is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a canceling process in the present embodiment that is executed by the main MPU 72. In the cancel processing, first, a cancel command is set (step S3001). The processing contents of the sub-side MPU 82 when the cancel command is set are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, the storage area specifying process (FIG. 38) is executed (step S3002) in the same manner as step S1410 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Thereby, the lottery result data set in the read target bit in the storage area with the higher priority among the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74 is read. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current read target bit corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S3003).

  When it corresponds to the continuation loss result (step S3003: NO), similarly to step S1416 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area is shifted. Processing is executed (step S3004). Thereby, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In addition, the process of overwriting the mth bit with the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit for the storage areas 101a to 104a that have been read the lottery result data this time is executed.

  On the other hand, when it corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S3003: YES), the subtraction process of the counter is executed and the storage area as in step S1416 of the continuous chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The shift process is executed (step S3005). Thereby, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the success / failure determination number counter 105. In addition, the process of overwriting the mth bit with the data stored in the (m + 1) th bit for the storage areas 101a to 104a that have been read the lottery result data this time is executed. Thereafter, the value of the bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by one. The bonus continuation counter is a counter for measuring the number of times that the lottery result data is identified to correspond to the continuation winning result in one processing time of the cancellation process.

  When the process of step S3004 is executed, or when the process of step S3006 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 is “0”. When the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 is not “0” (step S3007: NO), the process returns to step S3002. As a result, when the cancel operation is executed, it becomes a specifying target whether or not all the lottery result data correspond to the continuous winning result.

  If the value of the success / failure determination counter 105 is “0”, it is determined in step S3008 whether the value of the bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is “0”. When the value of the bonus continuation counter is “0” (step S3008: YES), the drive table corresponding to the continuation loss result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission is set (step S3008: YES). S3009). The processing content of step S3009 is the same as step S1412 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Thereby, the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  On the other hand, if the value of the bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3008: NO), if the value of the bonus continuation counter is “1”, the process proceeds to step S3011, and the value of the bonus continuation counter is 2. If so, the process proceeds to step S3012. In step S3011, the drive table corresponding to the first continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written in the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission is set. The processing content of step S3011 is the same as step S1414 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Thereby, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result in the first embodiment is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S3012, the drive table corresponding to the second continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission is set. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R operate in a manner different from both the case where the driving table corresponding to the continuation failure result is read and the case where the driving table corresponding to the first continuation winning result is read. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled. Specifically, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have once moved from the standby position to the continuation corresponding position, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to 1 while maintaining the state where the three “BAR” symbols are aligned. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled so that three "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle subline SL3. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that two or more new execution times of the bonus state will occur in the future.

  When the value of the bonus continuation counter is 2 or more, when the next execution of the bonus state is completed, the next execution of the bonus state is immediately started without shifting to the continuation chance period. It becomes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the bonus continuation counter is “L” which is 2 or more, the bell for specifying the end timing of the bonus state at the start of a new execution time of the bonus state. By setting a value of 20 × L in the establishment counter, the bonus state for a plurality of execution times may be digested as one execution time.

  After executing any one of steps S3009, S3011, and S3012, the unit effect flag in the main RAM 74 is set to “1” (step S3013).

  In the case of the embodiment described in detail above, when the cancellation operation for the continuation chance period is performed, regardless of whether or not the lottery result data targeted for identification includes data corresponding to the continuation winning result, all Whether or not the lottery result data corresponds to the continuous winning result is determined. And the unit effect corresponding to the result of the specific process with respect to all the lottery result data is executed only once. As a result, when a cancel operation is performed, the specific process for all the lottery result data existing at that time is completed, and the effects corresponding to the specified results are consolidated into one unit effect. It becomes possible to make it.

  In the case where a plurality of data corresponding to the continuous winning results are included in the lottery result data as the specific target, it is different from the case where only one data corresponding to the continuous winning results is included. A unit effect is executed. As a result, when a cancel operation is performed regardless of whether or not the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included, all the lottery result data are included in the specified target in the configuration in which the lottery result data is specified. It is possible to execute a unit effect in a manner corresponding to the number of lottery result data that are supported.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents of the ART state process executed by the sub-side MPU 82 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing ART state processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the sub-side MPU 82. In the ART state process, first, in step S3101, as the other processes, the same processes as steps S2001 to S2022 of the ART state process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the ART state process, when a winning result command has been received (step S3102: YES), the value of the ART game number counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S3103). Then, if the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S3104: YES), the ART continuous lottery process is executed (step S3105). In the ART continuous lottery process, the ART continuous lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, in a 2 msec cycle) is read out. The value is checked against the ART continuous lottery table. The ART continuous lottery table is set so that, for example, the ART continuous winning is performed with a probability of 10%.

  If the result of the ART continuous lottery process is the ART continuous winning result (step S3106: YES), a process for setting the ART game number counter is executed (step S3107). In the set process, the number of continued games (for example, 50 games) is set in the ART game number counter in the sub-side RAM 84. In this case, the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is maintained at “4”. Thus, a new execution time of the ART state is started without the gaming state shifting from the ART state to the ART end branch state.

  On the other hand, if the result of the ART continuous lottery process is not the ART continuous winning result (step S3106: NO), “5” is set to the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S3108). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the ART end branch process (step S910) in the next AT process (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART state to the ART end branch state.

  In the case of the embodiment described above in detail, even if one execution time in the ART state is completed, a new execution time in the ART state is started without shifting to the ART end branch state, and a transition is made to the ART end branch state. After that, there is a case where a new execution time of the ART state is started. This makes it possible to diversify the game state transition mode when the ART state execution times are newly executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case of this configuration, the player expects that a new execution time of the ART state will be started as it is in the last game in one execution time of the ART state, and the transition to the ART end branch state occurs. In addition, it is expected that the ART state transitions to a new execution time in the ART end branch state. As a result, points expected by the player can be generated in stages, and from this point, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as a case where a new execution time in the ART state is executed, there are a case where the ART continuous lottery process is performed and a case where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more. As a result, there are a plurality of types of triggers for continuously executing the ART state, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the continued execution of the ART state.

  Further, in the configuration in which there are a plurality of types of triggers for continuously executing the ART state as described above, the ART is not changed depending on the type of the trigger without causing the transition to the ART end branch state. There are a case where a new execution time of the state is started and a case where a new execution time of the ART state is started after entering the ART end branch state. As a result, when a new execution time of the ART state is started, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize on what occasion the start of the new execution time of the ART state has occurred. Become.

  When the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, a new execution time of the ART state is started without causing the transition to the ART end branch state, and the ART continues lottery process. A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the ART end branch state occurs when a continuous winning is made.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. Good.

  (1) In a configuration in which a continuous lottery process is executed in a game that is won at any of IV = 7-10, an execution lottery process is executed when a winner is won at any of IV = 7-10 And it is good also as a structure by which a continuous lottery process is performed when winning by an execution lottery process. In this case, if one of IV = 7 to 10 wins, the execution of one unit performance of the unit effect is not ensured, and IV = 7 to 10 wins and further execution lottery processing is performed. When the execution is won, one execution of the unit effect is secured. In addition, when a winning combination is obtained for IV = 7-10, continuous lottery processing is executed reliably, and for other winning combinations, it continues with a predetermined probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%). The lottery process may be executed.

  (2) If the winning combination is IV = 7-10, the continuous lottery process is executed with certainty or with a specific probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%), and the result of the continuous lottery process continues. If the result is a winning result, the unit effect is definitely executed, and if the result of the continuous lottery process is a result of continuation losing, the unit effect is executed with a predetermined probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%). It is good also as composition which becomes. In this case, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the unit effect is executed to a predetermined frequency when the result of the continuous lottery process is a result of continuation losing, while increasing the frequency at which the continuous lottery process is executed.

  (3) If the winning is any of IV = 7 to 10, the continuous lottery process is executed reliably or with a specific probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%), and the result of the continuous lottery process continues. It is good also as a structure used as the execution target of a unit effect with the predetermined probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%) in any case where the result is a winning result and the result of the continuous lottery process is a result of continuation failure. In this case, it may be configured to be a unit performance execution target with the same probability regardless of whether it is a continuous winning result or a continuous off result. It may be configured with a higher probability that it will be the execution target of the unit effect than in the case of being, and the configuration in which the probability of being the execution target of the unit effect is lower in the case of the continuous winning result than in the case of the continuation loss result Good.

  (4) In place of IV = 7-10 in addition to the configuration in which the continuous lottery process is executed when winning is won at any of IV = 7-10, winning is won at any of IV = 1-6. In this case, the continuous lottery process may be executed. In this case, each winning probability of IV = 1 to 6 is higher than each winning probability of IV = 7 to 10. Therefore, when winning is selected in any of IV = 1 to 6, a predetermined lottery process is performed. The continuous lottery process is executed when the winning is performed with a probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%), and the continuous lottery process is surely executed when the winning is achieved with any of IV = 7 to 10 It is good also as a structure to be.

  In addition, the execution lottery process is executed in each game in the bonus state regardless of the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72, and a predetermined probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%) in the execution lottery process. ) May be configured such that the continuous lottery process is executed when an execution win is achieved. In this case, the probability of winning in the execution lottery process may be different depending on the result of the lottery process in the main MPU 72, and the probability of winning in the execution varies depending on the result of the lottery process in the role. It is good also as a structure which does not.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which a continuous lottery process is performed according to the winning result in each game. In this case, in the lottery process of the combination in the main MPU 72 (FIG. 10), the winning combination is established by winning the winning combination and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order of the execution trigger target. In such a case, the continuous lottery process may be executed. In this configuration, when a winning combination is won in the winning lottery process, a corresponding notification is given before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated, and an execution trigger target is set. By preventing the stop order from being executed, the continuous lottery process is executed in accordance with the stop order selection result by the player. Therefore, the player's awareness of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is increased. It becomes possible to raise.

  (5) In the continuous chance period, the unit effect is executed in preference to the lottery result data of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the higher probability of the continuous winning result. It is good also as a structure used as the execution object of a unit effect preferentially from the lottery result data of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the low probability of a result. In addition, instead of the configuration that is grouped according to the probability of the continuous winning result and is subject to the execution of the unit effect in order from a predetermined group, according to the acquisition order of the lottery result data regardless of the probability of the continuous winning result It is good also as a structure used as the execution object of a unit production.

  (6) When the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed, the continuation chance period ends at that time. Instead, it is assumed that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. Alternatively, when the execution trigger for the unit effect remains, the unit effect may be executed until the continuation chance period continues and the execution trigger disappears. In this case, since the continuation chance period does not end in a state where the execution trigger of the unit effect remains, the carry-over trigger of the unit effect does not occur. Further, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed a plurality of times in one continuous chance period, the bonus state execution times are repeated as many times as the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. A configuration may be adopted, and the number of continued games in a new execution time in the bonus state may be increased by the number of times the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed.

  (7) In the case where the continuous lottery process is executed in a game that has been won at any of IV = 7 to 10, the presence / absence of a continuous winning result and the number of continuous winning results when the continuous chance period starts Can be specified. In this case, in addition to the unit effect during the continuous chance period, an effect corresponding to the degree of expectation that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed during the continuous chance period may be executed. A configuration in which an effect suggesting that a unit effect to be executed is executed before the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result may be executed, and an effect corresponding to the number of continuous winning results is executed. Alternatively, an effect that suggests that there are a plurality of continuous winning results may be executed. In this case, there is an effect that the player pays attention to in addition to the unit effect during the continuous chance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the continuous chance period.

  (8) The unit effect is not limited to the configuration executed using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and may be configured to be executed by a device different from the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. For example, a unit effect may be executed using image display in the image display device 66. Even in this case, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the unit effect once corresponding to one execution time of the continuous lottery process in the continuous chance period. Further, in a configuration in which the unit effect is executed by a device different from the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on which stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. It is good also as a structure by which a continuation chance period is performed under the condition where the start and stop of rotation are not prevented. In this case, even if the continuation chance period occurs, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped.

  (9) In the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the operation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect is not limited to that of the above embodiment and is arbitrary. . For example, the unit effect is not executed by moving the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from the standby position toward the continuation corresponding position, but the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enter the constant speed rotation period through the acceleration period. One unit effect may be executed by an operation in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops after at least one turn. In this configuration, the rotation speed of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect is the rotation speed of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. It is good also as a structure which is the same. In the case of this configuration, in the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result, the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed such that the same symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are aligned on a straight line. In the unit effect corresponding to the continuation losing result, the stop result corresponding to the continuation losing result may be displayed so that the same symbols are not arranged in a straight line. Further, for example, during the continuation chance period, the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are continued, and each unit effect is executed by changing the rotation direction, changing the rotation speed, and changing the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be rotated. It is good also as a structure.

  (10) In the unit effect, all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are configured to operate in the rotation direction. Instead, some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are maintained in a stopped state. A unit effect may be executed by operating the remaining reels in the rotation direction. For example, the unit effect may be executed by rotating the remaining one reel while the two reels are stopped. In this case, when the same predetermined symbol is stopped on one straight line in two stopped reels, and the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result, the rotation of the remaining reels is completed. When the predetermined symbol is stopped on the straight line and the result of the continuous lottery process is a result of continuous losing, the predetermined symbol is not stopped on the straight line when the rotation of the remaining reels is finished. Configuration is conceivable.

  (11) It is not limited to the configuration in which the unit effect is repeatedly executed in the continuous chance period, and the continuous lottery is started until the continuous chance period is started as in the case where the cancel operation is executed in each of the above embodiments. Even when the process is executed a plurality of times or when the execution chance of the continuous lottery process is generated a plurality of times, the unit effect corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process may be executed only once. Good. In this case, the continuation period of the continuation chance period can be shortened.

  (12) The reel 32L in which the continuation chance period is after the game start condition is established based on the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 10) is performed. Instead of starting the rotation of 32M and 32R, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R starting to rotate according to the result of the winning lottery process are started instead. May be performed before the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose stop order is the predetermined stop order, and the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination is performed. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to be rotated may stop before the last process in the main MPU 72 of the game is executed. It may be configured to be performed before the operation of the start lever 41 for even after the last process in the main side MPU72 of beam is performed to start the next game is enabled.

  Here, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that is a game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state and that is subjected to stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) in the game is stopped. When the continuation chance period is executed after the bonus, a new execution of the bonus state can be started when the same symbol combination is established in a straight line in the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result It becomes. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a new execution time of the bonus state is started when the combination of the same symbols is established on a straight line, and a new execution time of the bonus state is started. It is possible to enhance the feeling of uplifting.

  (13) Although the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect is stopped regardless of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the continuous chance period, instead of this, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed. May also be configured to be stopped. In this case, the stop control of the rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, but the result of the continuous lottery process regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The corresponding stop result will be displayed. In this configuration, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which the stop control is performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the combination are the stop buttons 42. It is preferable that the player is able to distinguish between the two operations since the operations are performed in response to the operations of .about.44. Therefore, at the stage where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect is finished, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved up and down so as to vibrate, and stop control is performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be completely stopped when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed.

  (14) Although the unit effect is started when the start restriction period has elapsed even if the unit effect start operation is not executed in the continuation chance period, the unit effect start operation is performed instead. The unit effect may not be started unless it is executed. In addition, the unit effect may be started only when the start restriction period has elapsed. In this case, not only the execution period of the unit effect but also the period from the end of one execution unit effect until the start of the next execution unit effect can be made constant. In this configuration, by specifying the number of executions of unit effects executed in the continuous chance period at the start of the continuous chance period, the duration of the continuous chance period is specified, and when the continuous period elapses, the continuous chance It is good also as composition which ends a period.

  (15) The operation means for executing the unit production start operation is not limited to the first credit insertion button 47 but may be the start lever 41. In this case, the start operation of the unit effect can be performed by the same operation as that for starting the normal game.

  (16) Each execution time of the unit effect in the continuous chance period is not limited to a configuration that ends when the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit effect of the execution time is stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, It is good also as a structure which each execution time of a unit production | finish is complete | finished when the duration of the unit production | presentation set as more than the time which 32R starts an operation | movement and stops is passed. In this case, it is possible to ensure that the duration of each execution of the unit effects is a predetermined period.

  (17) The game is not limited to a configuration in which the continuation chance period occurs in a game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. It is good also as a structure where a continuation chance period generate | occur | produces in the game performed before the game used as an end opportunity. Further, in a configuration in which a continuous chance period occurs only when a continuous winning result is obtained in the continuous lottery process, and only a unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, one execution of the bonus state is performed. The continuation chance period may be generated in the first game in the bonus state newly started after the game is completed.

  (18) The duration of the continuation chance period is fixed, and at least one of the duration of each unit presentation and the number of unit presentations executed in the continuation chance period is adjusted within the range of the continuation period. Good. In this case, a period during which the start or stop of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed can be set as a certain period. .

  (19) An upper limit period is set for the duration of the continuation chance period, and in the range up to the upper limit period, each execution of the unit effect is executed according to the number of lottery result data, and the upper limit period is reached. If the remaining lottery result data includes data corresponding to the continuous winning result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is a unit effect in which the remaining lottery result data is aggregated. Is executed once, and if the remaining lottery result data does not include data corresponding to the continuous winning result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuation losing result is 1 as the unit effect in which the remaining lottery result data is aggregated. It is good also as a structure performed once. In this case, the period during which the start or stop of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed can be set within the upper limit period. It becomes.

  (20) When the cancel operation is executed in the continuation chance period, the continuation chance period may be immediately ended without executing the unit effect thereafter. In this case, in the situation where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed, a new execution time of the bonus state is performed after the game ends. The notification of whether or not to start may be executed in the image display device 66 or the like.

  (21) Instead of the configuration in which the cancel operation cannot be performed in the opening period of the continuation chance period, a configuration in which the cancel operation can be performed in the opening period may be employed. In this case, when the cancel operation is executed as in the first embodiment, the unit effect corresponding to the remaining lottery result data is executed only once. It is good also as a structure which a unit effect is performed only once and a continuation chance period ends. In addition, when the cancel operation is executed as in (20) above, in the configuration in which the unit chance effect is not executed and the continuation chance period ends, the continuation chance period ends even during the opening period. Also good.

  (22) When the number of unit effects executed in the continuous chance period reaches the upper limit, the unit effects corresponding to the remaining lottery result data are executed only once and the continuous chance period ends. Good. In this case, when the continuous lottery result is included in the remaining lottery result data, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous lottery result is executed only once, and the continuous lottery result is not included in the remaining lottery result data The unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result may be executed only once.

  (23) The canceling operation during the continuation chance period may be impossible. In this case, the unit effect is executed as many times as the number of times the continuous lottery process is executed.

  (24) In the fifth embodiment, when a cancel operation is performed during the continuation chance period, in a situation where the data corresponding to the continuation win result is included in the remaining lottery result data, after the cancel operation The content of one unit effect to be executed may be configured to correspond one-to-one with the number of data corresponding to the continuous winning result. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of times of execution of the bonus state occurring thereafter from the content of the unit effect.

  (25) Even if the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is not executed in the continuous chance period, the lottery process of the combination until the ending period elapses after the ending period is set after the last unit effect is executed A configuration in which the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of FIG. 10 is executed is prevented may be maintained.

  (26) When the unit effect corresponding to the winning result is executed in the continuation chance period that occurs in the game that becomes the end of one execution time of the bonus state, a new execution time of the bonus state is started. For example, the ART state may be started.

  (27) In the ART end branch state, the pre-branch condition is satisfied when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2, and when the pre-branch condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state and Although the branch to any of the new execution times in the ART state can occur, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the result of the lottery process of the main MPU 72 (FIG. 10) is a specific result, the pre-branch condition may be satisfied regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning result. . Further, for example, the pre-branch condition may be satisfied when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes a predetermined stop order regardless of the result of the lottery process of the main MPU 72 (FIG. 10). . Further, as a result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 10), when the number of digested games after shifting to the ART end branch state becomes the predetermined number of games regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning result. A configuration may be adopted in which the pre-branch condition is satisfied.

  (28) In the ART state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 in the ART end branch state without satisfying the condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state. A configuration in which a condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state can be satisfied in the at least one of the conditions before the branch pre-condition is satisfied, the pre-branch condition is satisfied, and the pre-branch condition is satisfied. It is good. In this case, in the ART end branch state, the game is played while expecting that a condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied.

  (29) After the pre-branch condition is established when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 in the ART end branch state, the IV in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) = When the winning is selected at any of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) before winning at any of 19 to 24, a new execution of the ART state starts. Before winning in any one of IV = 15-18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), winning in any one of IV = 19-24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). When it becomes, it is good also as a structure which transfers to a normal game state.

  (30) In the ART end branch state, when winning is made with IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) and when winning is won with IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) In any of the cases, the stop order notification for the effect can be executed, but instead, the stop order for the effect may be notified only in one of them. For example, when it is configured such that the notification of the stop order for effects can be executed only when winning is won at IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), the lottery of the main MPU 72 in the ART end branch state Whether the condition that the stop order notification is executed before the condition that the mode shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution in the ART state is satisfied Regardless of whether it is constant, after the above pre-branch condition is satisfied, the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed depends on whether or not the condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied Will fluctuate. As a result, in the situation before the pre-branch condition is established, the player can expect a new execution time of the ART state to start regardless of the execution frequency of the stop order notification. Once established, the player can be expected to start a new execution time in the ART state in relation to the execution frequency of the stop order notification.

  (31) Even when the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the normal mode ST1, the condition disappears and the normal gaming state is entered. It is good also as a structure which transfers.

  (32) In the ART end branch state, when winning is made with IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) and when winning is won with IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) In this case, the probability that the stop order for production is executed is higher when the condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied than when the condition is not satisfied. Thus, both probabilities may be the same, or a configuration in which a condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied may be lower than a case in which the condition is not satisfied.

  (33) The probability that the stop order notification is executed in the ART end branch state is greater when the condition for starting a new execution of the ART state is satisfied than when the condition is not satisfied. Instead of a high configuration, a configuration in which both probabilities are the same may be adopted, and a configuration in which a condition for starting a new execution of an ART state is satisfied is lower than a case in which the condition is not satisfied It is good.

  (34) Instead of the configuration in which only one lottery mode called the first RT mode ST2 exists between the normal mode ST1 and the second RT mode ST3, a configuration in which a plurality of lottery modes exist may be used. It may be configured that no other lottery mode exists between the mode ST1 and the second RT mode ST3.

  (35) The probability of winning in any one of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is IV in any of 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). It is not limited to a configuration that is higher than the winning probability, and both probabilities may be the same or substantially the same, and any one of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). It is good also as a structure where the probability of winning in is lower than the probability of winning in any of IV = 19-24 in the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16).

  (36) The winning data types may be different at IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). Specifically, the normal replay winning data and the first special replay winning data are set in common in IV = 11 to 14, but the types of winning data set other than that are different. Also good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the types of winning data differ by IV = 15-18 in the lottery table for normal modes (FIG. 11). Specifically, the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set in common at IV = 15 to 18, but the types of winning data set other than that may be different. Good. It should be noted that the configuration in which the types of winning data set as a whole are made different from each other in this way is applied to IV = 11 to 14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). Alternatively, it may be applied to IV = 15-18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), or may be applied to IV = 19-24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). It may be applied to IV = 11-14 in the 2RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), or may be applied to IV = 16-21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). You may apply to IV = 11-16 in a table (FIG. 20).

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, a privilege for paying out medals is awarded when a small role winning is established. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the player is given a certain privilege. I just need it. For example, a configuration in which prizes other than medals are paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credits owned by a player, an increase in credited medals corresponds to provision of a privilege.

  (38) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, and C-type, A-type and C-type composite type, B-type and C-type composite type, RT game, CT game or AT The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a type equipped with a game.

  (39) The symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, and the like, but may be geometric lines or figures. In addition, the design can be configured by light, color, or the like, the design can be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be configured by combining these. That is, it is sufficient that the symbol has a function as information having distinguishability.

  (40) In each of the above-described embodiments, an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied has been shown. Also good.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Identifies that a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, winning in any of IV = 7 to 10 in bonus RT mode ST5, making a positive determination in step S2408 in the second embodiment) is established A condition establishment specifying means (a function for executing the process of step S1105 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2405 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment);
Grant lottery means (first embodiment) for executing grant lottery processing for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the fact that the predetermined condition is established by the condition satisfaction specifying means In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1107 in the main MPU 72, the function of executing the process of step S2507 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment),
When the result of the grant lottery process is the grant winner result, the effect content corresponding to the winning is obtained, and when the result of the grant lottery process is the result of losing, the winner corresponding effect (unit effect) becomes the effect content corresponding to the miss. Effect execution control means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing steps S1412 and S1414 in the main MPU 72, in the second embodiment of steps S2509 and S2511 in the main MPU 72). A function for executing the processing, a function for executing the processing of step S2812 and step S2814 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment),
The success / failure effects that are executed in correspondence with the result of the one grant lottery process are collectively executed in the success / failure period (continuation chance period) for the number of times that the success / failure effect is executed. Period setting means (a function of executing processing for starting a continuation chance period and processing for continuation chance in the main MPU 72);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since the benefit is granted when the result of the grant lottery process becomes the grant winner result, the player can perform the game while expecting that the grant lottery process is executed and the result becomes the winner winner result. Will be performed. In addition, when the grant lottery process is executed, the success / failure effect of the content corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process is executed, so that the player's expectation can be suitably enhanced by the success / failure effect. It becomes.

  In this case, even if a predetermined condition is established in a period before the success / failure period, the success / failure effect is not executed, and one execution of the success / failure effect for one execution of the grant lottery process is performed. Are executed collectively. As a result, it is possible to consolidate situations in which the player's expectation is enhanced by the success / failure effect during the success / failure period, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the success / failure effect.

  In addition, the player pays attention to the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period before the success / failure period, and the player recognizes that the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the granted winning result is executed in the rejection period. Pay attention. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the phenomenon which a player pays attention to according to a situation, and it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game also from this point.

  Furthermore, even if it is the structure which performs the result corresponding to the success / failure in the success / failure period, the grant lottery process is performed once, regardless of whether or not the result is the winning / winning result in the success / failure period. In this case, the success / failure effect is executed once. As a result, the success / failure effect can be repeatedly executed during the success / failure period, and a situation in which the success / failure response effect is confirmed while expecting can be repeatedly generated.

  From the above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The period setting means includes
Even if the execution of the success / failure effect for all of the predetermined conditions established until the success / failure period is started, if the end condition is satisfied, the end of the success / failure period is ended. Execution means (function for executing the processing of step S1613 in the main MPU 72);
If the end condition is satisfied and the success / failure period ends in a situation where the execution of the success / failure corresponding effect for all of the predetermined conditions established until the success / failure period is started, Carry-over means (a result determination result of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a) for executing the result corresponding to the non-execution for the success / failure period;
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising:

  According to the feature A2, even if the execution of all the success / failure effects is not completed, if the end condition is satisfied, the success / failure period ends, and the success / failure period ends at an appropriate timing. It becomes possible. In this case, if the end condition is satisfied and the period for success / failure is ended in a situation where execution of all the success / failure effects has not been completed, the time corresponding to the non-execution of the corresponding / non-executable period will be performed. Executed. As a result, even when the end-use condition is satisfied and the success / failure period ends in the middle, it is possible to prevent the execution opportunity of the success / failure effect from being lost.

Feature A3. The end condition is established when the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the grant winning result is executed,
The gaming machine includes a privilege granting unit (a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for granting the privilege after the success / failure effect is executed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A3, when the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the grant winning result is executed, the success / failure period corresponding to the grant winning result and the granting of the privilege are granted by the end of the success / failure period. This makes it easier for players to understand the relationship. In this case, even if the success / failure period ends in the middle due to the execution of the success / failure effect corresponding to the granted winning result with the configuration of the feature A2, the success / failure of the unexecuted portion in the next and subsequent success / failure periods Since the corresponding effect is executed, even if the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant winning result is executed halfway, the opportunity for the further execution of the corresponding / win corresponding effect corresponding to the grant winning result may not be lost. It becomes possible.

Feature A4. The grant lottery means executes the grant lottery process based on the fact that the predetermined condition is established in a predetermined period by the condition establishment specifying means;
The predetermined period exists before the validity period,
When the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the grant winning result is executed in the success / failure period, the predetermined period continues after the success / failure period ends,
The carry-over means is continuously executed when the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant winning result is executed and the success / failure period ends when the unexecuted portion of the success / failure effect remains. The gaming machine according to the feature A2 or A3, wherein the non-executed portion corresponding to the success / failure effect is executed in a new execution time of the success / failure period after the predetermined period.

  According to the feature A4, since the success / failure effect is executed in the subsequent success / failure period based on the game content in the predetermined period, the game shows what is the execution opportunity of the success / failure effect that is collectively executed in the failure time period. It becomes easy for the player to recognize, and as a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined period.

  In addition, when a success / failure effect corresponding to the result of the winning / winning is executed in the time / failure period, the predetermined period continues after the end of the time / failure period, so that a player who expects the predetermined period to continue is It will be expected that the success / failure effect corresponding to the result will be executed.

  In addition, when the success / failure effect corresponding to the granted winning result is executed in the success / failure period, even if all of the feasible success / failure effects are not completed, the success / failure period ends and the predetermined period is By being executed, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the occurrence of the success / failure-response effect corresponding to the granting result is an opportunity for a predetermined period that is continued thereafter.

  In addition, even if the success / failure period ends in the middle due to the execution of the success / failure effect corresponding to the granted winning result, it is possible to respond to the unexecuted portion in the new execution times of the success / failure period after the continuous predetermined period. Since the effect is executed, even if the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant winning result is executed in the middle, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for further execution of the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant winning result from being lost. It becomes.

  Feature A5. The period setting means, when the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant winning result is not executed in the success / failure period, the success / failure effect corresponding to the number of the predetermined conditions established until the success / failure period is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, further comprising means (a function of performing a negative determination in step S1605 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature A5, when the success / failure effect corresponding to the granted winning result is not executed, the number of the predetermined conditions established until the success / failure period is started without the success / failure period being ended halfway. Since the success / failure effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to understand the contents of the success / failure period.

  Feature A6. The period setting means is configured such that the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant lottery process executed at a predetermined timing is more than the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant lottery process executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing. Means to be executed first (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S1416 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing step S2816 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein:

  According to the feature A6, since each success / failure effect corresponding to the grant lottery process is executed according to the execution order of the grant lottery process, the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant winner result occurs at irregular timings. Become. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to each execution time of the success / failure effect.

Feature A7. There are a plurality of the predetermined conditions,
The grant lottery means executes the grant lottery process so that the probabilities of the grant winning results differ according to the type of the predetermined condition that triggered the execution of the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A6.

  According to the feature A7, since the probability that the result of the grant win in the grant lottery process varies according to the type of the predetermined condition, the player not only satisfies the predetermined condition in the period before the success / failure period, It is expected that a predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the giving lottery process with a high probability of giving the winning prize will be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A8. The period setting means has a second probability that the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the grant lottery process executed so that the probability of the grant winning result becomes the first probability is the grant probability result. Preferential execution means for executing the priority processing over the winning / corresponding effect corresponding to the grant lottery processing executed so as to be executed (in the first embodiment, the storage area specifying process in the main MPU 72 is executed) A function for executing the process of step S2504 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2810 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine according to Feature A7.

  According to the feature A8, the execution order of the corresponding success / failure corresponding effects is different according to the probability of the grant winning result in the grant lottery process. As a result, it is possible to actively cause a situation in which the probability of execution of the success / failure response corresponding to the result of the grant to be executed is relatively high in the same success / failure period. It is possible to give inflection.

  Feature A9. The period setting means is a priority execution means (in the first embodiment) that preferentially executes the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the grant lottery process on the side having a higher probability of becoming the grant winning result. A function for executing a storage area specifying process in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the process in step S2504 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a process in step S2810 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine according to Feature A7 or A8, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function).

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to increase the probability that the success / failure effect corresponding to the granting result is executed at an early stage.

  Feature A10. The period setting means is a success / failure effect corresponding to the granted winning result even in a situation where execution of the success / failure effect is not completed for all of the predetermined conditions established until the success / failure period is started. The game machine according to feature A9, further comprising an end execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1613 in the main MPU 72) for ending the notification period when is executed.

  According to the feature A10, when the success / failure effect corresponding to the granting result is executed, the success / failure period is terminated halfway. In this case, in the case where the configuration of the feature A9 is provided, the probability that the success / failure effect corresponding to the awarded winning result is executed at an early stage is increased, and the success / failure effect corresponding to the granted winning result is executed. Makes it possible to easily end the success / failure period early.

  Feature A11. The period setting means, for the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant lottery process having the same probability of being the winning winning result, the success / failure effect corresponding to each grant lottery process according to the order in which the grant lottery process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A10, wherein:

  According to the feature A11, even if the execution order of the success / failure effects is determined in accordance with the probability of the grant winning result, the success / failure effects corresponding to the grant winning result occurs at irregular timings. It is possible to increase the player's degree of attention to each execution time of the success / failure effect.

Feature A12. The grant lottery means executes the grant lottery process at a timing before the success / failure period when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine includes a result information storage unit (result determination result first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a) for storing result information corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the period setting unit is configured to execute the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the result information in the success / failure period.

  According to the feature A12, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the grant lottery process is executed, and the result information is collectively confirmed in the success / failure period, and the success / failure corresponding effect is repeatedly executed. This makes it possible to distribute the execution timing of the grant lottery process compared to a configuration in which the grant lottery process is executed collectively in the success / failure period, so that the processing load does not increase locally in the success / failure period. It becomes possible to.

Feature A13. Pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
The picture variation display is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the picture variation display is stopped based on the stop operation means being operated. Pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
With
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern by the control of the displaying control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. The corresponding profit is given to the player,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the effect execution control means is configured to execute the success / failure effect using the picture display means.

  According to the feature A13, it is possible to execute the success / failure effect using the picture display means for performing the game in the game round.

  Feature A14. The effect execution control means is configured to display an end mode corresponding to a result of the grant lottery process by the picture in the picture display means when the success / failure corresponding effect is finished. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A14, since the end mode corresponding to the result of the assigned lottery process is displayed by the design in the design display means in the success / failure effect, the success / failure effect is realized using the design display means. It becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize the end timing of one execution time of the corresponding effect and the result of the assigned lottery process corresponding to the success / failure corresponding effect of each execution time.

  Feature A15. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, wherein the performance execution control means ends the success / failure-related effect regardless of the operation of the stop operation means.

  According to the feature A15, the success / failure effect is terminated regardless of the operation of the stop operation means, so that the processing configuration for executing the success / failure response effect is simplified, and the termination mode of the success / failure effect is set to a predetermined value. Control in the case of setting to the end mode is facilitated.

  Feature A16. The effect execution control means starts the success / failure-response effect when the player performs a start / failure-response operation, and the start restriction period elapses without the start operation being performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A15, characterized in that a success / failure effect is started.

  According to the feature A16, when the start operation is executed by the player, the success / failure effect is started, so that the success / failure effect can be started by the player's positive operation. In addition, when the start restriction period elapses, the success / failure corresponding effect is forcibly started, so that the success / failure period can be prevented from becoming excessively long.

  Feature A17. The effect execution control means executes the success / failure corresponding effect by causing the variation display of the pattern to be performed in a manner different from the variation display mode of the design corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A16, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A17, in the configuration in which the success / failure presentation effect is executed using the picture display means, the variation display of the pattern in the success / failure correspondence presentation is clearly different from the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. It becomes possible to distinguish and make the player recognize.

  Feature A18. The effect execution control means executes the success / failure corresponding effect by causing the variation display of the pattern to be performed at a speed slower than the variation display speed in the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A17, wherein:

  According to feature A18, the player who is used to the variable display speed of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination clearly recognizes the difference when confirming the variable display of the pattern in the effect corresponding to the success / failure Will be. In addition, it is possible to give a player an unexpectedness that the display speed of the pattern changes.

  Feature A19. In the case where the effect execution control means starts the success / failure effect, the situation in which the pattern stop mode in the pattern display unit is a predetermined pre-start mode (respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged at standby positions). The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A18, wherein the display of the variation of the pattern is started in the situation).

  According to the feature A19, when the pattern stop mode before the start of the success / failure effect is unified to the predetermined pre-start mode, the success / response response is started and the success / response response is started. Can be clearly recognized by the player.

Feature A20. Pre-start notification control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1305 and S1309 in the main MPU 72) is executed in the pre-start notification period to notify the player that the validity period is started. ,
The period setting means is configured to start the success / failure effect after the pre-start notification period ends.
The game machine according to Feature A19, wherein the effect execution control means causes the pattern stop mode in the pattern display unit to be the predetermined pre-start mode during the pre-start notification period.

  According to the feature A20, the stop mode of the pattern on the pattern display unit is adjusted to a predetermined pre-start mode by using a period during which a notification for allowing the player to recognize that the success / failure effect is started is executed. It becomes possible.

Feature A21. The pre-start notification period is set as a certain period,
The longest period assumed as a period necessary for the pattern stop mode of the pattern display means to be the predetermined pre-start mode is equal to or shorter than the pre-start notification period. Game machines.

  According to the feature A21, in the configuration in which the pre-start notification period is set to be a fixed period and the processing configuration is simplified regarding the setting of the end trigger of the pre-start notification period and the identification of the end trigger, the pre-start notification period Within this range, it is possible to adjust the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means to a predetermined pre-start mode.

Feature A22. The production execution control means includes:
In the success / failure-related effect corresponding to the granted winning result, when the success / failure-related effect ends, means for displaying a winning-corresponding stop mode by the design in the design display means (in the first embodiment) The function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72, the function of executing the process of step S2511 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2814 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. )When,
In the success / failure effect corresponding to the detachment result, when the success / failure response effect ends, means for causing the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means to be the predetermined pre-start mode (in the first embodiment) A function of executing the process of step S1412 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2509 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2812 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A19 to A21, comprising:

  According to the feature A22, in the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the winning winning result, the player clearly recognizes that the winning winning result is obtained by the stop mode of the picture on the picture displaying means being the winning corresponding stop mode. It becomes possible to make it. On the other hand, in the success / failure effect corresponding to the result of losing, not only does the player clearly recognize that the result of losing results, because the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means is a predetermined pre-start mode. Even if a new execution time of the success / failure effect is subsequently started, it is not necessary to adjust the pattern stop mode.

Feature A23. The effect execution control means, in the success / failure effect corresponding to the grant winning result, when the success / failure effect ends, the pattern display means so that a predetermined pattern or a predetermined pattern combination stops on a predetermined line. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing step S1414 in the main MPU 72; in the second embodiment, the function of executing step S2511 in the main MPU 72; in the fourth embodiment, the main A function of executing the process of step S2814 in the side MPU 72),
The predetermined pre-start mode is the predetermined pattern or the predetermined pattern when the pattern display unit moves by one pattern toward the predetermined line in one pattern display area or in each of a plurality of pattern display areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features A19 to A22, wherein the pattern combination is stopped on the predetermined line.

  According to the feature A23, it is possible to reduce the moving amount of the pattern in the success / failure effect, and it is possible to shorten the digestion time in each execution time of the success / failure effect.

Feature A24. Pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A normal game operation in which the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the fact that the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Pattern display control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means to be performed;
With
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern by the control of the displaying control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. The corresponding profit is given to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A23, wherein the success / failure period proceeds in a restricted state in which the start or progress of the normal gaming operation is restricted.

  According to the feature A24, the success / failure period is performed in a state in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted, so that the player's attention to the success / failure period can be increased.

  Feature A25. The period setting means makes a negative determination in step S1605 in the main MPU 72 so that the success / failure period is extended when the success / failure corresponding effect is newly started in the success / failure period. The gaming machine according to Feature A24, which includes a function of executing the processing from step S1606 onward.

  According to the feature A25, since the success / failure period is extended when the success / failure effect is newly started, the entire duration of the current failure / use period is calculated at the start of the success / failure period, There is no need to specify the end timing of the service period in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start timing of the validity period.

  Feature A26. The game machine according to Feature A25, wherein the effect execution control means starts the success / failure-response effect when a start operation of the success / failure-response effect is executed.

  According to the feature A26, when the start operation is executed by the player, the success / failure effect is started, so that the success / failure effect can be started by the player's positive operation. Further, even if the start timing of the success / failure effect is determined irregularly, the duration of the success / failure period is extended when it is determined that the success / failure response effect is newly started. Therefore, the duration can be made appropriate.

Feature A27. The period setting means is configured to start the success / failure period after a start condition for a game round in which the normal game operation is executed is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A26, wherein a stop result of the change display of the pattern by the normal game operation of the corresponding game round is displayed after the corresponding use refusal period ends.

  According to the feature A27, by displaying the result of stopping the display of the variation of the pattern by the normal game operation of the corresponding game time after the success / failure period ends, the fact that the rejection period has ended is displayed through the operation of the pattern display means. It becomes possible to make a player recognize clearly. Further, in the configuration in which the success / failure effect is executed using the pattern display means, the player is informed that the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the success / failure response effect is different from the stop mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the role. It can be recognized.

  Feature A28. The gaming machine according to Feature A27, wherein the normal gaming operation of the corresponding gaming times is started after the success / failure period ends.

  According to the feature A28, since the normal gaming operation is started after the success / failure period ends, the player can clearly recognize that the success / failure period has ended. In addition, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the execution control of the normal gaming operation as compared with the configuration in which the success / failure period is executed in the middle of the normal gaming operation.

Feature A29. A state setting means for setting a game state in which the normal game operation is executed to a predetermined game state to be executed a plurality of times, and ending the predetermined game state when a game time that is an end trigger in the predetermined game state is executed. (A function for executing bonus RT management processing in the main MPU 72)
The game machine according to any one of features A24 to A28, wherein the period setting means generates the success / failure period in the game times that are the triggers for termination.

  According to the feature A29, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the game times that become the end timing of the predetermined game state.

  Feature A30. Without reducing the number of executions of the grant lottery process and the number of grants of privileges corresponding to the result of the grant, the subsequent execution of the success / failure effect in the success / failure period is stopped and the success / failure period ends. And a predetermined setting means (a function for executing the canceling process in the main MPU 72) for performing execution restriction, which is one of reducing the number of the success / failure effects executed in the success / failure period. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A29.

  According to the feature A30, it is possible to prevent the number of times corresponding to the success / failure effect to be executed in the success / failure period from being increased more than necessary. In addition, even if such execution restrictions are performed, the number of executions of the grant lottery process and the number of grants of privileges corresponding to the result of the grant win will not decrease, so that the player's profit is not lost, It is possible to prevent the number of times of success / failure effects to be executed during the period from becoming unnecessarily large.

  Note that the configuration in which the duration of the failure period is shorter when the execution restriction is executed by the predetermined setting unit than when the execution restriction does not occur is applied to the configuration of the feature A30. May be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the duration of the success / failure period from being fixed as it is even though the execution restriction of the success / failure effect has occurred.

  Feature A31. The gaming machine according to Feature A30, wherein the predetermined setting means limits the execution based on a predetermined response operation performed by a player.

  According to the feature A31, it is possible for a player who does not want to repeatedly execute the success / failure effect to be limited by the player's own selection during the success / failure period. .

  Feature A32. The predetermined setting means, when performing the execution restriction, causes an effect that allows a player to recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the success / failure-response effect that is subject to the execution restriction. The gaming machine according to Feature A30 or A31, wherein

  According to the feature A32, even when the execution restriction of the success / failure effect occurs, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the execution / response response subject to the execution restriction. Become.

  Feature A33. The predetermined setting means, when performing the execution restriction, according to whether or not the grant winning result is included in a result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the success / failure effect subjected to the execution restriction. Depending on the number of the winning winning results included in the result of the granting lottery process corresponding to the success / failure-related effect subject to the execution restriction, a different effect is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature A32, wherein

  According to the feature A33, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of occurrences of the awarded winning result even when the execution restriction of the success / failure effect occurs.

  In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature A33, “when the predetermined setting unit performs the execution restriction, the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the success / failure effect subjected to the execution restriction is obtained. When the number of the winning winning results included in the first reference number is 1 or more, the first reference effect is executed, and the success / failure effect subject to the execution restriction is selected. When the number of the winning winning results included in the corresponding result of the lottery process is the second reference number larger than the first reference number, the second reference effect is executed. "Is conceivable.

  Feature A34. The game machine according to any one of features A30 to A33, wherein the predetermined setting unit is configured to execute a predetermined effect different from the effect corresponding to the success / failure when the execution restriction is performed.

  According to the feature A34, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the execution restriction of the success / failure effect has occurred by executing a predetermined effect different from the corresponding / impact response effect.

Feature A35. Pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
The picture variation display is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the picture variation display is stopped based on the stop operation means being operated. Pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
With
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern by the control of the displaying control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. The corresponding profit is given to the player,
The effect execution control means is configured to execute the success / failure corresponding effect using the design display means,
The gaming machine according to Feature A34, wherein the predetermined setting unit is configured to execute the predetermined effect using an effect executing unit different from the picture display unit.

  According to the feature A35, it is possible to execute the success / failure effect using the pattern display means. In this case, since the predetermined effect is executed using an effect execution means different from the picture display means, it is clear to the player that the execution restriction of the success / failure effect has occurred through the difference of the effect execution means. Can be recognized.

  Feature A36. The predetermined setting means is configured to execute the success / failure corresponding effects corresponding to the lottery results for a plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process at a time, so that in the success / failure period The gaming machine according to any one of features A30 to A35, wherein the number of executions of the success / failure effect to be executed is reduced.

  According to the feature A36, when a decrease in the number of times corresponding to the success / failure occurs, one success / failure corresponding effect is executed for a plurality of lottery results of the assigned lottery process. Even if this occurs, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the assigned lottery process corresponding to the success / failure effect targeted for reduction through the execution of the success / failure effect.

Feature A37. The predetermined setting means includes
Result confirmation means for sequentially confirming the result of the grant lottery process that can be the trigger for execution of the success / failure effect during the success / failure period (in the first embodiment, the function of executing steps S1702 and S1703 in the main MPU 72, In the third embodiment, the function of executing processing in steps S2601 and S2602 in the main MPU 72, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing processing in steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 72, in the sixth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of steps S3002 and S3003 in the main MPU 72),
When the result confirmation means confirms the grant winning result, the corresponding success / failure effect corresponding to the grant winning result is the winning / corresponding effect corresponding to the lottery result of the grant lottery process that has been confirmed. Aggregation execution means to be executed once (function of executing steps S1706 and S1709 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, step S2606 and step S2609 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment A function for executing processing, a function for executing processing in steps S2908 and S2911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and a processing in steps S3009, S3011 and S3012 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment. Function)
A gaming machine according to Feature A36, comprising:

  According to the feature A37, when the number of times corresponding to the success / failure effect is reduced, the execution of the success / failure response effect corresponding to the result of losing that has been confirmed by the time the confirmation result of the winning effect is confirmed is omitted. The success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the result is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of success / failure effects while allowing the player to clearly recognize that the result is a winning winning result.

  Feature A38. The aggregation execution means, when the result confirmation means does not confirm the grant winning result, the success / failure corresponding to the lottery results of all the assignment lottery processes that can be the trigger for the success / failure effect during the success / failure period. The gaming machine according to Feature A37, wherein the success / failure corresponding effect corresponding to the detachment result is executed once as the corresponding effect.

  According to the feature A38, in the case where the number of the winning / corresponding effects is reduced and the result of the granting is not confirmed, the winning / corresponding effect corresponding to the losing result is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of success / failure effects while allowing the player to clearly recognize that the result of the winning prize is not achieved.

  Feature A39. Aggregation execution means (in the first embodiment, in the main MPU 72) that executes the success / failure corresponding effects corresponding to the lottery results for a plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process. The function of executing steps S1706 and S1709, the function of executing steps S2606 and S2609 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment, and the steps S2908 and S2911 of the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment. Any one of features A1 to A38 is provided with a function of executing processing, a function of executing processing of steps S3009, S3011, and S3012 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) Game machines.

  According to the feature A39, it is possible to reduce, as necessary, the number of times corresponding to the success / failure effect that occurs in the failure use period.

Feature A40. Game time control means (function to execute normal processing in the main MPU 72) that performs execution control of the game rotation operation in the game execution means based on the player's operation in each game time,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A39, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the content of the game times.

  According to the feature A40, since a predetermined condition is established according to the contents of the game times, the player pays attention to the contents of the game times in the period before the success / failure period. The player pays attention to the fact that the success / failure effect corresponding to the result is executed.

Feature A41. The grant lottery means executes the grant lottery process based on the fact that the predetermined condition is established in a predetermined period by the condition establishment specifying means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined period exists before the success / failure period.

  According to the feature A41, since the success / failure presentation effect is executed in the subsequent success / failure period based on the game content in the predetermined period, the game shows what is the execution timing of the success / failure presentation effect that is collectively executed in the failure period. It becomes easy for the player to recognize, and as a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined period.

  Feature A42. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A41, wherein the duration of the success / failure period varies according to the number of the success / failure effects performed in the success / failure period.

  According to the feature A42, the duration of each of the success / failure effects is adjusted according to the number of executions of the success / failure effects or the number of executions of the success / failure effects is not adjusted in accordance with the number of executions of the success / failure effects. The duration of the success / failure period varies depending on the number of executions of the corresponding effects. Thereby, the freedom degree of design is raised regarding the content of the success / failure effect of each execution time and the number of the failure response effects executed in the success / failure period.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A42, any one or more configurations of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A normal game operation in which the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the fact that the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Pattern display control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means to be performed;
With
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern by the control of the displaying control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. In gaming machines where the corresponding profit is given to the player,
Specific state setting means for setting a specific gaming state (continuation chance period) in which the start or progression of the normal gaming operation is restricted (a function of executing processing for starting a continuation chance period and processing for continuation chance in the main MPU 72); ,
An effect execution control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1412 and S1414 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, the second effect is such that a unit effect is executed each time an execution trigger occurs in the specific gaming state, second In the embodiment, a function of executing steps S2509 and S2511 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing steps S2812 and S2814 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment),
With
The continuation period of the specific gaming state varies according to the number of unit effects executed in the specific gaming state.

  According to the feature B1, since the unit effect is executed in a state where the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the unit effect. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. In this case, the duration of each unit effect is not adjusted according to the number of executions of the unit effect in the range where the duration of the specific gaming state is fixed, or the number of executions of the unit effect is not adjusted. The duration of the specific gaming state varies depending on the number of executions. Thereby, the freedom degree of design regarding the content of the unit effect of each execution time and the frequency | count of the unit effect performed in a specific game state is raised.

  In the configuration of the feature B1, the configuration “provides privilege providing means (a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) that gives a player a privilege corresponding to the content of the unit effect” is provided. You may apply.

  Feature B2. Period extension means for extending the duration of the specific gaming state when it is determined to newly start the unit effect in the specific gaming state (determination is made in step S1605 in the main MPU 72) The game machine according to Feature B1, further comprising a function of executing the processing from step S1606 onward.

  According to the feature B2, since the duration of the specific gaming state is extended when it is determined that the unit effect is newly started, the entire duration of the current specific gaming state is set at the start of the specific gaming state. There is no need to calculate or specify the end timing of the current specific gaming state in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start timing of the specific game state.

  Feature B3. The game machine according to Feature B2, wherein the effect execution control means starts the unit effect when the start operation of the unit effect is executed.

  According to the feature B3, when the start operation is executed by the player, the unit effect is started, so that the unit effect can be started by the player's positive operation. Even if the start timing of the unit effect is determined irregularly in this way, the duration of the specific gaming state is extended when it is determined that the unit effect is newly started, The duration can be made appropriate.

Feature B4. The specific state setting means is configured to start the specific game state after a start condition for a game round in which the normal game operation is executed is established,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, wherein after the specific gaming state is ended, a stop result of the display of the variation of the pattern by the normal gaming operation of the corresponding gaming time is displayed.

  According to the feature B4, after the specific game state is ended, the result of stopping the display of the variation of the pattern by the normal game operation of the corresponding game time is displayed, thereby indicating that the specific game state is ended through the operation of the pattern display means. It becomes possible to make a player recognize clearly. Further, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the picture display means, the player is made to recognize that the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the unit effect is different from the stop mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the role. It becomes possible.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the normal gaming operation of the corresponding gaming times is started after the specific gaming state is ended.

  According to the feature B5, since the normal game operation is started after the specific game state is ended, the player can clearly recognize that the specific game state is ended. In addition, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing execution control of the normal gaming operation compared to the configuration in which the specific gaming state is started in the middle of the normal gaming operation.

Feature B6. A predetermined state setting for setting a game state in which the normal game operation is executed to a predetermined game state to be executed a plurality of times, and ending the predetermined game state when a game time that is an end timing in the predetermined game state is executed Means (function for executing bonus RT management processing in the main MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the specific state setting means generates the specific gaming state in the gaming times that are the end triggers.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the game times that become the end timing of the predetermined game state.

Feature B7. Execution restriction that is one of stopping the execution of the subsequent unit effect in the specific game state and ending the specific game state and reducing the number of unit effects executed in the specific game state. A predetermined setting means for performing (a function for executing a canceling process in the main MPU 72),
The game according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein when the execution restriction is executed by the predetermined setting means, the duration of the specific game state is shorter than when the execution restriction is not generated. Machine.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to prevent the number of unit effects executed in the specific gaming state from being increased more than necessary. In this case, since the duration of the specific game state is shortened when the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs, the duration of the specific game state is fixed as it is even though the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs. It becomes possible to prevent it.

  Feature B8. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the predetermined setting unit performs the execution restriction based on a predetermined response operation performed by a player.

  According to the feature B8, a player who does not want the unit effect to be repeatedly executed can restrict execution of the unit effect in the specific game state by the player's own selection. In addition, a player who does not want the unit effect to be repeatedly executed in this way is likely to want to end the specific gaming state early. On the other hand, when the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs, the duration of the specific game state can be shortened.

Feature B9. The production execution control means is configured to execute the unit production in a manner corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process,
When performing the execution restriction, the predetermined setting means is configured to execute an effect that allows a player to recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is the target of the execution restriction. The gaming machine according to Feature B7 or B8, characterized by

  According to the feature B9, even when the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is subject to the execution restriction.

  Feature B10. The predetermined setting means, when performing the execution restriction, depending on whether or not a grant winning result is included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is subject to the execution restriction, Alternatively, different presentations are executed according to the number of grant winning results included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit presentation subject to the execution restriction. The gaming machine according to Feature B9.

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of occurrences of the winning result even if the execution restriction of the unit effect is performed.

  In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature B10, “in the case where the predetermined setting unit performs the execution restriction, among the results of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subjected to the execution restriction” If the number of the winning winning results included in the first reference number is 1 or more, the first reference effect is executed and corresponds to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction. When the number of the winning winning results included in the result of the giving lottery process is the second reference number larger than the first reference number, the second reference effect is executed " Configuration is conceivable.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B10, wherein the predetermined setting unit is configured to execute a predetermined effect different from the unit effect when the execution restriction is performed.

  According to the feature B11, by executing a predetermined effect different from the unit effect, the player can clearly recognize that the execution limitation of the unit effect has occurred.

Feature B12. The effect execution control means uses the picture display means to execute the unit effect,
The gaming machine according to Feature B11, wherein the predetermined setting unit is configured to execute the predetermined effect using an effect executing unit different from the picture display unit.

  According to the feature B12, it is possible to execute the unit effect using the picture display means. In this case, since the predetermined effect is executed using an effect execution means different from the picture display means, it is clearly indicated to the player that the execution restriction of the unit effect has occurred through the difference of the effect execution means. It can be recognized.

Feature B13. The production execution control means is configured to execute the unit production in a manner corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process,
The predetermined setting means is executed in the specific gaming state by causing the unit effects corresponding to the lottery results to be executed in a single operation for a plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B12, wherein the number of unit effects is reduced.

  According to the feature B13, when a decrease in the number of unit effects occurs, one unit effect is executed for a plurality of lottery results of the assigned lottery process. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that has been reduced through the execution of the unit effect.

Feature B14. The predetermined setting means includes
Result confirmation means for sequentially confirming the result of the grant lottery process that can be the trigger for executing the unit effect in the specific gaming state (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1702 and S1703 in the main MPU 72, the first In the third embodiment, the function of executing steps S2601 and S2602 in the main MPU 72. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 72. In the sixth embodiment, the main. The function of executing the processing of step S3002 and step S3003 in the side MPU 72),
When the result winning means confirms the winning result, the unit effect corresponding to the granted winning result is executed once as the unit effect corresponding to the lottery result of the grant lottery process that has been confirmed so far. Aggregation execution means to be performed (in the first embodiment, the function of executing steps S1706 and S1709 in the main MPU 72, and in the third embodiment, executing the processing of steps S2606 and S2609 in the main MPU 72) A function for executing the processing of step S2908 and step S2911 in the main side MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S3009, step S3011 and step S3012 in the main side MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment. When,
The gaming machine according to Feature B13, comprising:

  According to the feature B14, when the number of unit effects decreases, the execution of the unit effects corresponding to the detachment result to be confirmed before the granted winning result is confirmed is omitted. The corresponding unit effect is executed once. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of unit effects while allowing the player to clearly recognize that the result is a winning winning result.

  Feature B15. The aggregation execution means, when the result confirmation means does not confirm the grant winning result, the unit effect corresponding to the lottery results of all the grant lottery processes that can be the trigger for the unit effect in the specific game state The game machine according to Feature B14, wherein the unit effect corresponding to the result of the detachment is executed once.

  According to the feature B15, when the reduction in the number of unit effects occurs and the result of granting is not confirmed, the unit effect corresponding to the losing result is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of unit effects while allowing the player to clearly recognize that the result of winning is not achieved.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B15, any one or more configurations of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Grant lottery means for executing the grant lottery process (function for executing step S1107 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, function for executing step S2507 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment),
A privilege granting means (a function for executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for granting a privilege to the player according to the result of the grant lottery process;
Production execution control means (in the first embodiment, the main side) that causes a unit production to be executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process every time an execution opportunity occurs in a specific gaming state (continuation chance period) A function for executing the processing of step S1412 and step S1414 in the MPU 72, a function for executing the processing of step S2509 and step S2511 in the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a step S2812 and step in the main side MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. The function of executing the processing of S2814),
In the specific gaming state, the execution of the subsequent unit effect in the specific gaming state is stopped and the specific gaming state is ended without affecting the number of executions of the grant lottery process and the content of the bonus. A predetermined setting means (a function for executing a canceling process in the main MPU 72) for performing execution restriction that is one of reducing the number of unit effects to be executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, the player pays attention to the unit effect by executing the unit effect corresponding to the result of the assigned lottery process in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the number of unit effects executed in the specific game state can be stopped or the number of unit effects executed in the specific game state can be reduced. Can be prevented from becoming more than necessary. Further, even if such execution restriction is performed, the number of executions of the grant lottery process and the grant contents are not affected, so that it is executed in a specific game state without losing the player's profit. It is possible to prevent the number of unit effects from increasing more than necessary.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein when the execution restriction is executed by the predetermined setting unit, the duration of the specific gaming state is shorter than when the execution restriction is not generated.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to prevent the continuation period of the specific gaming state from being fixed as it is even though the execution restriction of the unit effect has occurred.

  Feature C3. The gaming machine according to C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined setting unit performs the execution restriction based on a predetermined response operation performed by a player.

  According to the feature C3, it is possible for a player who does not want to repeatedly execute the unit effect to be restricted from executing the unit effect in the specific game state by the player's own selection.

  Feature C4. When performing the execution restriction, the predetermined setting means is configured to execute an effect that allows a player to recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is the target of the execution restriction. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized by:

  According to the feature C4, even when the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is subject to the execution restriction.

  Feature C5. The predetermined setting means, when performing the execution restriction, depending on whether or not a grant winning result is included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is subject to the execution restriction, Alternatively, different presentations are executed according to the number of grant winning results included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit presentation subject to the execution restriction. A gaming machine according to Feature C4.

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of occurrences of the awarded winning result even when the execution restriction of the unit effect is performed.

  In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature C5, “in the case where the predetermined setting unit performs the execution restriction, among the results of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subjected to the execution restriction” If the number of the winning winning results included in the first reference number is 1 or more, the first reference effect is executed and corresponds to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction. When the number of the winning winning results included in the result of the giving lottery process is the second reference number larger than the first reference number, the second reference effect is executed " Configuration is conceivable.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined setting unit is configured to execute a predetermined effect different from the unit effect when the execution restriction is performed.

  According to the feature C6, by executing a predetermined effect different from the unit effect, the player can clearly recognize that the execution limitation of the unit effect has occurred.

Feature C7. Pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
The picture variation display is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the picture variation display is stopped based on the stop operation means being operated. Pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
With
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern by the control of the displaying control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. The corresponding profit is given to the player,
The effect execution control means uses the picture display means to execute the unit effect,
The game machine according to Feature C6, wherein the predetermined setting unit is configured to execute the predetermined effect using an effect executing unit different from the picture display unit.

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to execute the unit effect using the pattern display means. In this case, since the predetermined effect is executed using an effect execution means different from the picture display means, it is clearly indicated to the player that the execution restriction of the unit effect has occurred through the difference of the effect execution means. It can be recognized.

  Feature C8. The predetermined setting means is executed in the specific gaming state by causing the unit effects corresponding to the lottery results to be executed in a single operation for a plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the number of unit effects is reduced.

  According to the feature C8, when a decrease in the number of unit effects occurs, one unit effect is executed for a plurality of lottery results of the assigned lottery process, and thus the number of unit effects decreases. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that has been reduced through the execution of the unit effect.

Feature C9. The predetermined setting means includes
Result confirmation means for sequentially confirming the result of the grant lottery process that can be the trigger for executing the unit effect in the specific gaming state (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1702 and S1703 in the main MPU 72, the first In the third embodiment, the function of executing steps S2601 and S2602 in the main MPU 72. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 72. In the sixth embodiment, the main. The function of executing the processing of step S3002 and step S3003 in the side MPU 72),
When the result winning means confirms the winning result, the unit effect corresponding to the granted winning result is executed once as the unit effect corresponding to the lottery result of the grant lottery process that has been confirmed so far. Aggregation execution means to be performed (in the first embodiment, the function of executing steps S1706 and S1709 in the main MPU 72, and in the third embodiment, executing the processing of steps S2606 and S2609 in the main MPU 72) A function for executing the processing of step S2908 and step S2911 in the main side MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S3009, step S3011 and step S3012 in the main side MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment. When,
The gaming machine according to Feature C8, comprising:

  According to the feature C9, when the number of unit effects decreases, the execution of the unit effects corresponding to the losing result that is the confirmation target is confirmed before the granted winning result is confirmed. The corresponding unit effect is executed once. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of unit effects while allowing the player to clearly recognize that the result is a winning winning result.

  Feature C10. The aggregation execution means, when the result confirmation means does not confirm the grant winning result, the unit effect corresponding to the lottery results of all the grant lottery processes that can be the trigger for the unit effect in the specific game state The game machine according to Feature C9, wherein the unit effect corresponding to the result of the detachment is executed once.

  According to the feature C10, when the decrease in the number of unit effects occurs and the result of granting is not confirmed, the unit effect corresponding to the losing result is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of unit effects while allowing the player to clearly recognize that the result of winning is not achieved.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C10, one or more configurations of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A normal game operation in which the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the fact that the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Pattern display control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means to be performed;
With
The normal game operation is executed in each game round,
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern by the control of the displaying control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. In gaming machines where the corresponding profit is given to the player,
A predetermined state setting means (a function for executing a bonus RT management process in the main MPU 72) for ending one execution time of the predetermined game state when a game time that is an end timing in the predetermined game state is executed;
Execution determining means for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player after one execution time of the predetermined gaming state has ended (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S1107 in the main MPU 72, the second In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2507 in the main MPU 72),
Specific state setting means for setting a specific gaming state (continuation chance period) in which the start or progression of the normal gaming operation is restricted (a function of executing processing for starting a continuation chance period and processing for continuation chance in the main MPU 72); ,
When it is determined by the execution determining means that a privilege is given to the player after one execution time of the predetermined gaming state is completed, the picture display is performed in the specific gaming state started before the privilege is granted. An effect execution control means (a function for executing the processing of step S1412 and step S1414 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, the second effect is such that a unit effect corresponding to the result of grant is executed using the picture in the means, second In the embodiment, a function of executing steps S2509 and S2511 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing steps S2812 and S2814 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, when a privilege is granted after the end of one execution of a predetermined gaming state, a specific gaming state in which the start or progress of the normal gaming operation is restricted before the privilege is granted occurs. In the specific game state, a unit effect corresponding to the result of grant is executed by the picture display means. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that the unit effect corresponding to the grant result is executed in the predetermined gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the unit effect corresponding to the grant result is executed using the picture display means, it is possible for the player who is paying attention to the display of the variation of the picture in the picture display means not to miss the unit effect. .

  Feature D2. The game machine according to Feature D1, wherein the specific state setting means sets the specific game state in the game time that becomes the end trigger or the next game time.

  According to the feature D2, since the unit effect corresponding to the grant result is executed immediately before the privilege is granted, the execution of the unit effect corresponding to the grant result corresponds to the grant of the privilege after the end of one execution of the predetermined gaming state. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that he is doing.

Feature D3. The specific state setting means is configured such that the specific game state is started in the game times that are the end triggers,
The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, wherein after the specific gaming state is ended, a stop result of the display of the variation of the pattern by the normal gaming operation of the gaming time serving as the end timing is displayed.

  According to the feature D3, the result of stopping the display of the variation of the pattern by the normal game operation of the game time that is the end timing after the specific game state is ended is displayed, thereby indicating that the specific game state has ended. It becomes possible to make a player recognize clearly through movement. Further, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the picture display means, the player is made to recognize that the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the unit effect is different from the stop mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the role. It becomes possible.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein after the specific gaming state is ended, the normal gaming operation of the gaming times serving as the end timing is started.

  According to the feature D4, since the normal gaming operation is started after the specific gaming state is ended, the player can clearly recognize that the specific gaming state has ended. In addition, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing execution control of the normal gaming operation compared to the configuration in which the specific gaming state is started in the middle of the normal gaming operation.

  Feature D5. In any one of the features D1 to D4, the execution determining unit determines whether or not to start a new execution time of the predetermined gaming state after one execution time of the predetermined gaming state is completed. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D5, it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation that a new execution time of the predetermined gaming state is started.

  Feature D6. If the execution determining means does not determine that the privilege is given to the player after one execution time of the predetermined gaming state has ended, the effect execution control means is configured to perform the above-described display in the picture display means in the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein a unit effect corresponding to a detachment result is executed using a picture.

  According to the feature D6, since the unit effect is executed even when the privilege is not given after one execution time of the predetermined game state is completed, it is possible to increase the chances that the unit effect is executed.

  Feature D7. The effect execution control means, when the unit effect corresponding to the grant result ends, causes the stop result corresponding to the grant result to be displayed by the picture in the picture display means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature D7, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the pattern display means, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the end timing of one execution time of the unit effect and the determination content corresponding to the unit effect. Become.

  Feature D8. The effect execution control means is configured to execute the unit effect by performing the variation display of the pattern in a manner different from the variation display manner of the design corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7.

  According to the feature D8, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the pattern display means, the display of the variation of the pattern in the unit effect is clearly distinguished from the display of the variation of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process. It becomes possible to make a player recognize.

  Feature D9. The effect execution control means executes the unit effect by causing the pattern variation display to be performed at a speed slower than the variation display speed in the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein:

  According to the feature D9, the player who is used to the variable display speed of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination clearly recognizes the difference when the variable display of the pattern in the unit effect is confirmed. It will be. In addition, it is possible to give a player an unexpectedness that the display speed of the pattern changes.

  Feature D10. When the effect execution control means starts the unit effect, the picture stop means in the picture display means is in a predetermined pre-start situation (the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged at the standby position). The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D9, wherein the display of the variation of the pattern is started in (1).

  According to the feature D10, the player is notified that the unit effect is started and the unit effect is started by unifying the pattern stop mode before the unit effect is started into a predetermined pre-start mode. Can be clearly recognized.

Feature D11. Pre-start notification control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1305 and S1309 in the main MPU 72) is executed in the pre-start notification period to notify the player that the specific gaming state is started. ,
The effect execution control unit is configured to start the unit effect after the pre-start notification period ends, and the pattern stop mode in the pattern display unit is the predetermined display in the pre-start notification period. The gaming machine according to Feature D10, wherein the gaming machine is a pre-start mode.

  According to the feature D11, the stop mode of the pattern on the pattern display means is adjusted to a predetermined pre-start mode by using a period during which a notification for allowing the player to recognize that the unit effect is started is executed. Is possible.

Feature D12. The pre-start notification period is set as a certain period,
The longest period assumed as a period necessary for the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means to be the predetermined pre-start mode is equal to or shorter than the pre-start notification period, as described in the feature D11 Game machines.

  According to the feature D12, in the configuration in which the pre-start notification period is set to be a fixed period, the processing configuration is simplified with respect to setting and specifying the end trigger of the pre-start notification period. It is possible to adjust the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means to a predetermined pre-start mode.

Feature D13. The production execution control means includes:
In the unit effect corresponding to the grant result, when the unit effect ends, the stop mode corresponding to the grant is displayed by the pattern after the change display of the pattern is performed from the situation which is the predetermined pre-start mode. Means for executing (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S1414 in the main MPU 72; in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2511 in the main MPU 72; The function of executing the process of step S2814 in the side MPU 72),
If it is not determined by the execution determination means that a privilege is given to the player after one execution time of the predetermined game state has been completed, the display of the variation of the pattern is performed from the situation that is the predetermined pre-start mode. Means for making the pattern stop mode become the predetermined pre-start mode after this (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S1412 in the main MPU 72, in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) A function of executing the process of step S2509, a function of executing the process of step S2812 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D10 to D12, comprising:

  According to the feature D13, in the unit effect corresponding to the grant result, the bonus is given after one execution time of the predetermined gaming state is ended by the stop mode of the picture in the picture display means being the stop mode corresponding to the grant. Can be clearly recognized by the player. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a privilege will be granted, the player stops that the privilege has not been determined by returning the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means to the pre-start mode. It is not necessary to adjust the pattern stop mode even when a new execution time of the unit effect is subsequently started.

Feature D14. The effect execution control means controls the picture display means so that a predetermined picture or a predetermined picture combination stops on a predetermined line when the unit effect ends in the unit effect corresponding to the grant result. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2511 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the step of the main MPU 72. A function of executing the processing of S2814),
The predetermined pre-start mode is the predetermined pattern or the predetermined pattern when the pattern display unit moves by one pattern toward the predetermined line in one pattern display area or in each of a plurality of pattern display areas. The game machine according to any one of features D10 to D13, wherein the pattern combination is stopped on the predetermined line.

  According to the feature D14, it is possible to reduce the movement amount of the pattern in the unit effect, and it is possible to shorten the digestion time in each execution time of the unit effect.

  Feature D15. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, wherein the effect execution control means ends the unit effect regardless of the operation of the stop operation means.

  According to the feature D15, since the unit effect ends regardless of the operation of the stop operation means, the processing configuration for executing the unit effect is simplified, and the end effect of the unit effect is changed to a predetermined end method. In this case, the control can be facilitated.

  Feature D16. The effect execution control means starts the unit effect when the player performs the start operation of the unit effect, and also when the start restriction period elapses without the start operation being performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15, wherein the game machine is started.

  According to the feature D16, when the start operation is executed by the player, the unit effect is started, so that the unit effect can be started by the player's positive operation. Further, since the unit effect is forcibly started when the start restriction period has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the specific gaming state from becoming excessively long.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D16, one or more configurations of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Game time control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for performing execution control of the game rotation operation in each game time based on the player's operation (reels 32L, 32M, 32R);
Execution time ending means (in the main MPU 72) for ending one execution time of the special game state when a game time that is an end opportunity is executed in a special game state (ART state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state The function of executing the process of step S2025),
A branch state setting means (a function for executing an ART end branch process in the main MPU 72) for setting a continuous branch state (ART end branch state) when one execution time of the special gaming state is ended;
Normal transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the normal gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (the first falling replay winning is established) in a state where the branch is possible in the continuous branching state (first RT mode ST2). A function of executing the process of step S2112 in the main MPU 72);
Special transition means (in the main MPU 72) for starting a new execution of the special gaming state when the special transition condition is satisfied (the second RT replay winning is established) in the situation where the branch is possible in the continuous branch state The function of executing the process of step S2108),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when one execution time of the special gaming state is finished, the state is shifted to the continuous branch state even when a new execution time of the special gaming state is started thereafter. As a result, the player expects that a new execution time of the special game state will be started in the continuous branch state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the continuous branching state, the branching is possible regardless of whether a new execution time of the special gaming state is started or a transition to the normal gaming state occurs. As a result, it is possible to make the progress mode of the continued branching state uniform in the middle regardless of whether a new execution time of the special gaming state is started or a transition to the normal gaming state occurs. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state.

  Feature E2. In the situation where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is established, the special transition means satisfies the special transition condition in the situation where the branch is possible in the continuous branch state. The game machine according to the feature E1, wherein a new execution time of the special gaming state is started.

  According to the feature E2, even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition to the continuous branch state is made when one execution time in the special gaming state is completed. As a result, even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is not satisfied, the player can expect a new execution time in the special gaming state to start in the continuous branch state. It becomes possible.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state can be satisfied before the transition to the continuous branch state occurs.

  According to the feature E3, even if a condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied in the special gaming state, the transition to the continuous branch state is made when one execution time in the special gaming state is completed. To do. As a result, even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is not satisfied, the player can expect a new execution time in the special gaming state to start in the continuous branch state. It becomes possible.

  Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the continuous branching state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to a player than the normal gaming state.

  According to the feature E4, it may be advantageous for the player to continue the continued branching state. In this case, even if a condition for starting a new execution state of the special gaming state is satisfied, when one execution time of the special gaming state is completed, the state is shifted to the continuous branching state, and then the new special gaming state is renewed. By starting the execution times, it is possible to further increase the advantage when the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied.

  Feature E5. The expected number of game media to be acquired per unit game round does not become less than the expected number of game media to be acquired per unit game round in the special gaming state until at least the branchable state in the continuous branch state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4.

  According to the feature E5, it may be advantageous for the player to continue the continued branching state. In this case, even if a condition for starting a new execution state of the special gaming state is satisfied, when one execution time of the special gaming state is completed, the state is shifted to the continuous branching state, and then the new special gaming state is renewed. By starting the execution times, it is possible to further increase the advantage when the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied.

  Feature E6. The branchable state occurs as at least one condition that the result of the lottery process is a result corresponding to branch transition (IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table). The gaming machine according to any one of E5.

  According to the feature E6, the timing at which the branchable state occurs in the continuous branch state can be made irregular. In particular, when the configuration of the feature E4 or the feature E5 is provided, it may be advantageous for the player to continue the continuous branch state. Therefore, in the continuous branch state, the player can perform a new execution of the special game state. In addition to starting the game, the game is played while expecting that a branchable state does not occur, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the occurrence of the branchable state is avoided when a transition avoidance operation is performed by a player.

  According to the feature E7, since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the branchable state depending on the player's operation mode, the timing at which the branchable state occurs in the continuous branch state can be made irregular. . In particular, when the configuration of the feature E4 or the feature E5 is provided, it may be advantageous for the player to continue the continuous branch state. Therefore, in the continuous branch state, the player can perform a new execution of the special game state. The game is played with the expectation that the occurrence of the branchable state will be avoided as well as the start of the game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E8. In a situation where a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the branchable state occurs in the continuous branch state, the normal transition means The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, wherein transition to the normal gaming state is not performed.

  According to the feature E8, even in a situation where a condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is established, even if a predetermined transition condition is established in the situation in which the transition to the continuous branch state is established. Since the transition to the normal gaming state does not occur, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while not losing the benefit of starting a new execution time of the special gaming state.

  Feature E9. When a new execution time of the special gaming state is started, an output means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the main side MPU 72) is provided that performs a specific output outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E8.

  According to the feature E9, when the transition to the special transition state is performed, the specific output is performed, whereby the device outside the gaming machine can grasp that the execution time of the special game state has newly occurred. In this case, the configuration of the feature E1 is provided, and a new execution time of the special game state is started when the branchable state is changed to the special game state in the continuous branch state. Thus, even when one execution time of the special gaming state is ended and a new execution time of the special gaming state is started, the specific output is performed at the start of each execution time of the special gaming state. This makes it possible to individually grasp each execution time in a device outside the gaming machine.

  Feature E10. Special continuation means (function of executing step S3107 in the main MPU 72) for starting a new execution time of the special game state without shifting to the continuous branch state when one execution time of the special game state is completed ). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9.

  According to the feature E10, when a condition for starting a new execution state of the special gaming state is satisfied, when one execution time of the special gaming state ends, a new state of the special gaming state is entered after the transition to the continuous branch state. There are a case where an execution time is started and a case where a new execution time of the special gaming state is started without shifting to the continuous branch state. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which a new execution time of the special gaming state is started.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the feature E10,
“There are a first startable condition and a second startable condition as conditions for enabling the start of a new execution of the special gaming state,
When the first startable condition is satisfied, the transition to the continuous branch state is performed when one execution time of the special gaming state is completed, and the special branch state is set to the branchable state in the continuous branch state. When the transition condition is satisfied, a new execution time of the special gaming state is started by the special transition means,
When the second startable condition is satisfied, when one execution time of the special game state is completed, a new execution time of the special game state is generated by the special continuation means without causing a transition to the continuous branch state. Will start "
The configuration can be considered.

Feature E11. A pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern on each of the plurality of variation display sections;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
In the variation display section corresponding to the stop operation means, the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the stop operation means is operated. Pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped;
With
If a stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after displaying the variation of the pattern in the plurality of change display units, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. Of the player's profits are given to the player,
In the branchable state, the result of the lottery process of the combination is a result corresponding to branch transition (IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table), and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units is compatible with branch transition. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, wherein the gaming machine is generated when stopped in the order of.

  According to the feature E11, it is possible to make the timing at which the branchable state occurs in the continuous branch state irregular.

  Feature E12. Regardless of whether or not a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is satisfied, if the result of the lottery process of the combination in the continuous branch state is the result corresponding to the branch transition, The game machine according to Feature E11, wherein both the notification for preventing the order of branch transition and the notification for preventing the order of branch transition are not executed.

  According to the feature E12, when the result of the winning lottery process in the continuous branching state is a result corresponding to the branch transition, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the branchable state depending on the player's luck. In particular, in the case where the configuration of the feature E4 or the feature E5 is provided, it is advantageous for the player to continue the continued branching state. Therefore, the player's attention to the operation for avoiding the occurrence of the branchable state It becomes possible to increase the degree.

Feature E13. When a predetermined transition avoidance operation is performed by a player, the establishment of the predetermined transition condition is avoided,
A predetermined transition avoidance notification that allows the predetermined transition avoidance operation to be performed in a state where the branching enabled state is established when a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S2211 in the sub-side MPU 82).

  According to the feature E13, a condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied in the configuration in which the state is shifted to the continuous branch state even if a condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied. In this situation, it is possible to prevent the predetermined transition condition from being satisfied.

Feature E14. A pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern on each of the plurality of variation display sections;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
In the variation display section corresponding to the stop operation means, the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the stop operation means is operated. Pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped;
With
If a stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after displaying the variation of the pattern in the plurality of change display units, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. Of the player's profits are given to the player,
The predetermined transition condition is that the result of the lottery process for the combination is a result corresponding to the predetermined transition (IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table), and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units corresponds to the predetermined transition. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E13, which is established when the vehicle is stopped in the following order.

  According to the feature E14, the timing at which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the continuous branch state can be made irregular.

  Feature E15. If the result of the lottery process for the combination is the result of the predetermined transition in the situation where the branching is possible, the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied. For example, it is provided with a predetermined transition avoidance notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S2211 in the sub-side MPU 82) so that notification for preventing the order corresponding to the predetermined transition is executed. A gaming machine according to E14.

  According to the feature E15, even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied in the configuration in which the state is shifted to the continuous branch state. In this situation, it is possible to prevent the predetermined transition condition from being satisfied.

  Feature E16. In a situation where a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is established, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the branchable state is established in the continuous branch state, the normal transition means Although the transition to the normal gaming state does not occur, the gaming machine according to the feature E13 or E15 is characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than before.

  According to the feature E16, even in a situation where the condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is established, even if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the situation where the transition to the continuous branch state is established Since the transition to the normal gaming state does not occur, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while not losing the benefit of starting a new execution time of the special gaming state. However, if the condition for starting a new execution in the special gaming state is satisfied, if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the advantage for the player will be lower than before, so the predetermined transition condition It is possible to penalize the establishment of the predetermined transition condition in a situation where the establishment can be avoided.

Feature E17. The special transition condition is satisfied when a special transition operation is performed by the player,
When a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is established, a notification that enables the special transition operation is performed in the situation where the branching is possible, and the new special gaming state is updated. Special transition notification means (in the sub-side MPU 82) that makes a notification for avoiding the occurrence of the special transition operation in the situation in which the branching is possible when the condition for starting a proper execution time is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E16, which includes a function of executing the processing of step S2214 and step S2215.

  According to the feature E17, even when the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied in the configuration in which the state is shifted to the continuous branch state. The special transition condition is likely to be satisfied in the situation where the special game condition is established, and the special transition condition is not satisfied in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is not satisfied. .

Feature E18. A pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern on each of the plurality of variation display sections;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
In the variation display section corresponding to the stop operation means, the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the stop operation means is operated. Pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped;
With
If a stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after displaying the variation of the pattern in the plurality of change display units, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. Of the player's profits are given to the player,
The special transition condition is that the result of the lottery process for the combination is a result corresponding to special transition (IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table), and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units is special transition compatible. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E17, which is established when the vehicle is stopped in the following order.

  According to the feature E18, the timing at which the special transition condition is satisfied in the continuous branch state can be made irregular.

  Feature E19. If the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied when the result of the lottery process for the combination is the result of the special transition in the situation where the branching is possible If the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not established, notification for making the order for the special transition correspondence is executed, and the order for the special transition correspondence The game according to Feature E18, further comprising special transition notification means (a function of executing the processes of Step S2214 and Step S2215 in the sub-side MPU 82) so that notification for preventing the failure is performed. Machine.

  According to the feature E19, even when the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied in the configuration in which the state is shifted to the continuous branch state. The special transition condition is likely to be satisfied in the situation where the special game condition is established, and the special transition condition is not satisfied in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is not satisfied. .

Feature E20. A pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern on each of the plurality of variation display sections;
Bet number setting means (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion buttons 47-49) for setting the number of bets on the game medium;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation unit is operated in a situation where the bet number corresponding to a predetermined number of game media is set by the bet number setting unit, the display of the variation of the picture is started, and the stop operation unit is operated. Based on the above, the picture display control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture change display is stopped in the fluctuation display section corresponding to the stop operation means (function to execute the reel control process in the main MPU 72) )When,
With
If a stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after displaying the variation of the pattern in the plurality of change display units, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. Of the player's profits are given to the player,
The profit corresponding to the winning combination includes a re-game profit that allows a new game round to be started without requiring a new setting of the betting number of the game medium,
In the continued branch state, the occurrence frequency of the replay profit in the continued branch state does not become less than the occurrence frequency of the replay profit in the special game state until at least the branchable state is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E19.

  According to the feature E20, it is possible to make it more advantageous for the player to continue the continued branch state in relation to the occurrence frequency of the replay profit.

Feature E21. A pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern on each of the plurality of variation display sections;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
In the variation display section corresponding to the stop operation means, the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the stop operation means is operated. Pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped;
With
If a stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after displaying the variation of the pattern in the plurality of change display units, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. Of the player's profits are given to the player,
The predetermined transition condition is that the result of the lottery process for the combination is a result corresponding to the predetermined transition (IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table), and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units corresponds to the predetermined transition. If it is stopped in the order of
The special transition condition is that the result of the lottery process for the combination is a result corresponding to special transition (IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table), and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units is special transition compatible. If it is stopped in the order of
The gaming machine is
When the result of the lottery process of the combination is the result of the predetermined transition, the order for the predetermined transition is not provided if a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied. Predetermined transition avoidance notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2211 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows notification to be performed;
When the result of the lottery process of the combination is the result of the special transition correspondence, the order for the special transition correspondence is established if a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied. Special transition notification means (a function for executing the process of step S2214 in the sub-side MPU 82) to cause notification to be performed;
In the continuous branch state, the stop order of the variable display of the patterns on the plurality of variable display units is notified in a situation where the result of the lottery process of the combination is neither the result of the predetermined transition or the result of the special transition Specific notification means (function of executing the processing of step S2205 and step S2220 in the sub-side MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E20, comprising:

  According to the feature E21, in a situation where a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, the stop order is notified when the result of the winning lottery process is a result corresponding to the predetermined transition. In addition, the stop order is also notified when the result of the lottery process for the combination is a result of special transition correspondence. Then, the situation in which the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied is more continuous than the situation in which the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is not satisfied. It becomes easy to perform the notification of the stop order.

  In this case, even in a situation where the result of the lottery process for the combination is neither a result corresponding to the predetermined transition nor a result corresponding to the special transition, the notification of the stop order can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the notification of the stop order is executed in a situation where, for example, a condition for starting a new execution state of the special gaming state is satisfied, and for example, a new special gaming state. Even in a situation where a condition for starting a proper execution time is not satisfied, the stop order notification can be executed at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the fact that the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branching state.

  Feature E22. In the situation where the stop order is notified by the specific notification means, the pattern stop result mode when the display of the change of the pattern in the plurality of change display units is stopped according to the stop order is the lottery process of the combination The result becomes the result of the predetermined transition correspondence, and the mode is indistinguishable from the pattern stop result mode when the variation display of the pattern on the plurality of variation display units is stopped in an order different from the order of the predetermined transition correspondence. The gaming machine according to Feature E21, wherein:

  According to the feature E22, even if the stop order is notified by the specific notification unit, whether or not it is a stop order for avoiding the establishment of the predetermined transition condition from the stop result of the pattern change display in the pattern display unit. Can not be distinguished by the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the stop order notification has been executed in the continuous branch state.

  Feature E23. In the feature E21 or E22, the specific notification unit can perform the notification of the stop order in the continuous branch state where at least a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E23, since the notification of the stop order is executed even if the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied, a new execution time of the special gaming state is started. Even if the conditions are not satisfied, it is possible to make the player expect that a new execution time of the special game state will be started when the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state It becomes.

Feature E24. The result of the lottery process of the combination is a result corresponding to the specific transition (IV = 11-14 in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table), and the patterns in the plurality of variable display portions When the change display is stopped in the order corresponding to the specific transition, it is provided with means for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (bonus RT mode ST5) (function to execute the process of step S602 in the main MPU 72),
When the result of the lottery process of the combination is the result of the specific transition correspondence in the continuous branching state, the specific notification unit is configured to perform a notification so as not to be in the order of the specific transition correspondence. The gaming machine according to any one of features E21 to E23, wherein:

  According to the feature E24, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state by using the stop order notification executed to prevent the transition to the predetermined gaming state. It becomes.

Feature E25. When the result of the lottery process of the combination is a specific result (IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table, IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table), the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units It is a configuration that does not cause a transition of the gaming state regardless of the stop order,
In any one of the features E21 to E24, the specific notification unit may perform notification of the stop order when the result of the lottery process for the combination in the continuous branch state is the specific result. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E25, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state using the situation in which the result of the lottery process for the combination is a specific result that does not contribute to the transition of the gaming state. Become.

  Feature E26. The specific notification means is more effective when a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is satisfied than when a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The game machine according to Feature E25, wherein when the result of the lottery process of the combination becomes the specific result, the probability that the stop order is notified increases.

  According to the feature E26, the higher the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed, the higher the possibility that a new execution time of the special gaming state will be started. Therefore, the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree to this.

  Feature E27. The specific notification means is more effective when a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is satisfied than when a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E21 to E26, wherein the probability that the notification of the stop order is executed in the continuous branch state is increased.

  According to feature E27, the higher the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed, the higher the possibility that a new execution time of the special gaming state will be started. Therefore, the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree to this.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E27, one or more configurations of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern on each of the plurality of variation display sections;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a lottery process for a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
In the variation display section corresponding to the stop operation means, the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the stop operation means is operated. Pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped;
With
If a stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after displaying the variation of the pattern in the plurality of change display units, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. In gaming machines where the benefit of
Execution time ending means (in the main MPU 72) for ending one execution time of the special game state when a game time that is an end opportunity is executed in a special game state (ART state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state The function of executing the process of step S2025),
A branch state setting means (a function for executing an ART end branch process in the main MPU 72) for setting a continuous branch state (ART end branch state) when one execution time of the special gaming state is ended;
In the continuous branch state, the result of the lottery process for the combination becomes a result corresponding to the predetermined transition (IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table), and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units is the order corresponding to the predetermined transition. Normal transition means (function to execute the process of step S2112 in the main side MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to the normal gaming state when stopped at
In the continuous branching state, the result of the lottery process for the combination becomes a result corresponding to the special transition (IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table), and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units is the order corresponding to the special transition. Special transition means (function to execute the process of step S2108 in the main MPU 72) for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state when stopped at
When the result of the lottery process of the combination is the result of the predetermined transition, the order for the predetermined transition is not provided if a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied. Predetermined transition avoidance notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2211 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows notification to be performed;
When the result of the lottery process of the combination is the result of the special transition correspondence, the order for the special transition correspondence is established if a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied. Special transition notification means (a function for executing the process of step S2214 in the sub-side MPU 82) to cause notification to be performed;
In the continuous branch state, the stop order of the variable display of the patterns on the plurality of variable display units is notified in a situation where the result of the lottery process of the combination is neither the result of the predetermined transition or the result of the special transition Specific notification means (function of executing the processing of step S2205 and step S2220 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, in a situation where a condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied, the stop order is notified when the result of the lottery process of the combination is a result corresponding to the predetermined transition. In addition, the stop order is also notified when the result of the lottery process for the combination is a result of special transition correspondence. Then, the situation in which the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied is more continuous than the situation in which the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is not satisfied. It becomes easy to perform the notification of the stop order.

  In this case, even in a situation where the result of the lottery process for the combination is neither a result corresponding to the predetermined transition nor a result corresponding to the special transition, the notification of the stop order can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the notification of the stop order is executed in a situation where, for example, a condition for starting a new execution state of the special gaming state is satisfied, and for example, a new special gaming state. Even in a situation where a condition for starting a proper execution time is not satisfied, the stop order notification can be executed at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the fact that the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branching state.

  Feature F2. In the situation where the stop order is notified by the specific notification means, the pattern stop result mode when the display of the change of the pattern in the plurality of change display units is stopped according to the stop order is the lottery process of the combination The result becomes the result of the predetermined transition correspondence, and the mode is indistinguishable from the pattern stop result mode when the variation display of the pattern on the plurality of variation display units is stopped in an order different from the order of the predetermined transition correspondence. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein:

  According to the feature F2, even if the stop order is notified by the specific notification unit, whether or not it is a stop order for avoiding the order corresponding to the predetermined transition from the result of stopping the display of the variation of the pattern in the pattern display unit. Can not be distinguished by the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the stop order notification has been executed in the continuous branch state.

  Feature F3. In the feature F1 or F2, the specific notification means can execute the notification of the stop order in the continuous branch state where at least a condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F3, since the notification of the stop order is executed even if the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied, a new execution time of the special gaming state is started. Even if the conditions are not satisfied, it is possible to make the player expect that a new execution time of the special game state will be started when the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state It becomes.

Feature F4. The result of the lottery process of the combination becomes a result corresponding to another shift (IV in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table = 11 to 14), and the pictures in the plurality of variable display portions Means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (bonus RT mode ST5) (function to execute the process in step S602 in the main MPU 72) when
When the result of the lottery process of the combination is the result of the separate transition correspondence in the continuous branching state, the specific notification unit is configured to perform a notification so as not to be in the order of the separate transition correspondence. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein:

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state by using the stop order notification executed to prevent the transition to the predetermined gaming state. It becomes.

Feature F5. When the result of the lottery process of the combination is a specific result (IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table, IV = 22 in the second RT mode lottery table), the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units It is a configuration that does not cause a transition of the gaming state regardless of the stop order,
In any one of the features F1 to F4, the specific notification unit may perform notification of the stop order when the result of the lottery process for the combination in the continuous branch state is the specific result. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F5, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state by using the situation in which the result of the lottery process for the combination is a specific result that does not contribute to the game state transition. Become.

  Feature F6. The specific notification means is more effective when a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is satisfied than when a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The game machine according to Feature F5, wherein when the result of the lottery process for the combination becomes the specific result, the probability that the stop order is notified is increased.

  According to the feature F6, the higher the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed, the higher the possibility that a new execution time of the special gaming state will be started. Therefore, the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree to this.

  Feature F7. The specific notification means is more effective when a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is satisfied than when a condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the probability that the notification of the stop order is executed in the continuous branch state is increased.

  According to the feature F7, the higher the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed, the higher the possibility that a new execution time of the special gaming state will be started. Therefore, the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree to this.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F7, any one or more configurations of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to each feature of the feature A group to the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when a new game is started by operating the start lever in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  A spinning machine such as a slot machine: the rotation of the circulating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the circulating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is made according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants bonuses.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 45 ... Medal insertion slot, 47-49 ... Credit insertion button, 66 ... Image display apparatus, 72 ... Main side MPU , 82 ... sub-side MPU, 101a ... correct / incorrect result first storage area, 102a ... correct / incorrect result second storage area, 103a ... correct / incorrect result third storage area, 104a ... correct / incorrect result fourth storage area.

Claims (1)

A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern in each of the plurality of variation display units;
Start operation means operated to start display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation unit;
A plurality of stop operation means operated to stop the display of variation of the pattern in the pattern display means;
In the variation display section corresponding to the stop operation means, the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the stop operation means is operated. A game for controlling the design display means at each game time, when the change display of the picture is stopped and the change display of the picture in all of the plurality of change display units is stopped once. A time control means;
With
If a stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after displaying the variation of the pattern in the plurality of change display units, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. Of the player's profits are given to the player,
This game machine
An execution time ending means for ending one execution time of the special gaming state when a game time that is an end opportunity is executed in a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
A branch state setting means for setting a continuous branch state when one execution of the special gaming state is completed;
Normal transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the normal gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the branching is possible in the continuous branching state;
Special transition means for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state when a special transition condition is satisfied in the situation where the branching is possible in the continuous branch state;
Equipped with a,
The branchable state occurs when a result of the lottery process of the combination is a result corresponding to branch transition, and the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display units is stopped in an order corresponding to branch transition. To play.

Images